* ldlang.c (closest_target_match): Skip generic big and little
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
e7fc76dd 4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 5@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 6@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
7@include configdoc.texi
8@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 9@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 10@c man end
252b5132
RH
11
12@c @smallbook
13
ff5dcc92
SC
14@macro gcctabopt{body}
15@code{\body\}
16@end macro
17
0285c67d
NC
18@c man begin NAME
19@ifset man
20@c Configure for the generation of man pages
21@set UsesEnvVars
22@set GENERIC
0285c67d 23@set ARM
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
3c3bdf30 29@set MMIX
2469cfa2 30@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
31@set POWERPC
32@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
33@set Renesas
34@set SPU
35@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 36@set WIN32
e0001a05 37@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
38@end ifset
39@c man end
40
252b5132
RH
41@ifinfo
42@format
43START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
44* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
45END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
46@end format
47@end ifinfo
48
0e9517a9 49@copying
e49e529d
JM
50This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
51@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
52@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
53@end ifset
54version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 55
0e9517a9 56Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
ad22bfe8 572001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 58
cf055d54
NC
59Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
60under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
61or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
62with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
63Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 64section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 65@end copying
252b5132
RH
66@iftex
67@finalout
68@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 69@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 70@titlepage
71ba23f6 71@title The GNU linker
252b5132 72@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
73@subtitle @code{ld}
74@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
75@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
76@end ifset
252b5132
RH
77@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
78@author Steve Chamberlain
79@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
80@page
81
82@tex
83{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
84\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
85\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 86\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
87\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
88}
89\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
90@end tex
91
92@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 93@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9c8ebd6a 94Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
ad22bfe8 952002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d
NC
97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54
NC
119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 121section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
143@ifset HPPA
144* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
145@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
146@ifset M68HC11
147* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
152@ifset POWERPC
153* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
154@end ifset
155@ifset POWERPC64
156* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
158@ifset SPU
159* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
160@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
161@ifset TICOFF
162* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
163@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
164@ifset WIN32
165* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
166@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
167@ifset XTENSA
168* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
169@end ifset
252b5132
RH
170@end ifclear
171@ifclear SingleFormat
172* BFD:: BFD
173@end ifclear
174@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
175
176* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
177* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 178* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 179* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 180@end menu
84ec0e6d 181@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
182
183@node Overview
184@chapter Overview
185
186@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
187@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 188
0879a67a 189@ifset man
0285c67d 190@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 191ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
192@c man end
193
194@c man begin SEEALSO
195ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
196the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
197@file{ld}.
198@c man end
199@end ifset
200
201@c man begin DESCRIPTION
202
ff5dcc92 203@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 204their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 205compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
208a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
209to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
210
0285c67d
NC
211@ifset man
212@c For the man only
ece2d90e 213This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
214@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
215language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
216@end ifset
217
252b5132 218@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
219This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
220to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
221write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
222@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
223available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
224@end ifclear
225
226Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
227linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
228execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 229@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
230(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
231
0285c67d
NC
232@c man end
233
252b5132
RH
234@node Invocation
235@chapter Invocation
236
0285c67d
NC
237@c man begin DESCRIPTION
238
ff5dcc92 239The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
240and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
241you have many choices to control its behavior.
242
0285c67d
NC
243@c man end
244
252b5132
RH
245@ifset UsesEnvVars
246@menu
247* Options:: Command Line Options
248* Environment:: Environment Variables
249@end menu
250
251@node Options
252@section Command Line Options
253@end ifset
254
255@cindex command line
256@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
257
258@c man begin OPTIONS
259
252b5132
RH
260The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
261practice few of them are used in any particular context.
262@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 263For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
264object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
265link a file @code{hello.o}:
266
267@smallexample
268ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
269@end smallexample
270
ff5dcc92 271This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
272result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
273the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
274directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
275
ff5dcc92 276Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
277point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
278as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
279which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
280files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
281different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
282occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
283option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
284noted in the descriptions below.
285
286@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
287Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
288together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
289options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
290an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
291
292Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
293specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
294and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
295are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
296message @samp{No input files}.
297
36f63dca 298If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
299assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
300augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
301linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
302permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
303or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
304@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
305script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
306extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
307to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
308the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
309
310For options whose names are a single letter,
311option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
312whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
313option that requires them.
314
315For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 316precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 317@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 318this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 319only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
320@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
321name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
322output.
323
324Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
325option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
326immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
327@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
328Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
329accepted.
252b5132 330
36f63dca
NC
331Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
332(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
333prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
334compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
335
336@smallexample
337 gcc -Wl,--startgroup foo.o bar.o -Wl,--endgroup
338@end smallexample
339
340This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
341silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.
342
343Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
344linker:
345
ff5dcc92 346@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 347@include at-file.texi
dff70155 348
252b5132
RH
349@kindex -a@var{keyword}
350@item -a@var{keyword}
351This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
352argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
353@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
354@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
355to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
356
357@ifset I960
358@cindex architectures
359@kindex -A@var{arch}
360@item -A@var{architecture}
361@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
362@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
363In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
364Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
365@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
366the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 367archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
368family}, for details.
369
ff5dcc92 370Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
371other architecture families.
372@end ifset
373
374@ifclear SingleFormat
375@cindex binary input format
376@kindex -b @var{format}
377@kindex --format=@var{format}
378@cindex input format
379@cindex input format
380@item -b @var{input-format}
381@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
382@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
383file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 384@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 385that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 386configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 387to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
388default input format the most usual format on each machine.
389@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
390supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
391formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
392@xref{BFD}.
393
394You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
395binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
396linking object files of different formats), by including
397@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 398particular format.
252b5132
RH
399
400The default format is taken from the environment variable
401@code{GNUTARGET}.
402@ifset UsesEnvVars
403@xref{Environment}.
404@end ifset
405You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
406@code{TARGET};
407@ifclear man
408see @ref{Format Commands}.
409@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
410@end ifclear
411
412@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
413@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
414@cindex compatibility, MRI
415@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
416@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 417For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 418files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
419@ifclear man
420@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
421@end ifclear
422@ifset man
423the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
424@end ifset
425Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 426the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
427scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
428If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
429specified by any @samp{-L} options.
430
431@cindex common allocation
432@kindex -d
433@kindex -dc
434@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 435@item -d
252b5132
RH
436@itemx -dc
437@itemx -dp
438These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
439compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
440even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
441script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
442@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
443
444@cindex entry point, from command line
445@kindex -e @var{entry}
446@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 447@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
448@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
449Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
450program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
451named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
452and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
453base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
454@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
455and other ways of specifying the entry point.
456
b58f81ae
DJ
457@kindex --exclude-libs
458@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
459Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
460exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
461@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
462automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
463port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
464explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
465option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
466be treated as hidden.
467
252b5132
RH
468@cindex dynamic symbol table
469@kindex -E
470@kindex --export-dynamic
471@item -E
472@itemx --export-dynamic
473When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to the
474dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the set of symbols
475which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
476
477If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will normally
478contain only those symbols which are referenced by some dynamic object
479mentioned in the link.
480
481If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
482back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
483dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
484linking the program itself.
485
55255dae 486You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 487be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 488See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 489
36f63dca 490@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
491@cindex big-endian objects
492@cindex endianness
493@kindex -EB
494@item -EB
495Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
496
497@cindex little-endian objects
498@kindex -EL
499@item -EL
500Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 501@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
502
503@kindex -f
504@kindex --auxiliary
505@item -f
506@itemx --auxiliary @var{name}
507When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
508to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
509table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
510symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
511
512If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
513run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
514the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
515first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
516@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
517in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
518Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
519implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
520machine specific performance.
521
522This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
523will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
524
525@kindex -F
526@kindex --filter
527@item -F @var{name}
528@itemx --filter @var{name}
529When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
530the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
531of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
532on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
533
534If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
535run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
536dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
537filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
538found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
539used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
540@var{name}.
541
ff5dcc92 542Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 543toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
544object files.
545@ifclear SingleFormat
546The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 547@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 548@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
549environment variable.
550@end ifclear
551The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
552creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 553
3dbf70a2
MM
554@cindex finalization function
555@kindex -fini
556@item -fini @var{name}
557When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
558executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
559address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
560the function to call.
561
252b5132
RH
562@kindex -g
563@item -g
564Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
565
566@kindex -G
567@kindex --gpsize
568@cindex object size
569@item -G@var{value}
570@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
571Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
572@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
573MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
574sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
575
576@cindex runtime library name
577@kindex -h@var{name}
578@kindex -soname=@var{name}
579@item -h@var{name}
580@itemx -soname=@var{name}
581When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
582the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
583which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
584linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
585field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
586
587@kindex -i
588@cindex incremental link
589@item -i
590Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
591
3dbf70a2
MM
592@cindex initialization function
593@kindex -init
594@item -init @var{name}
595When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
596executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
597of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
598function to call.
599
252b5132 600@cindex archive files, from cmd line
bcb674cf
RS
601@kindex -l@var{namespec}
602@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
603@item -l@var{namespec}
604@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
605Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
606list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
607If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
608will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherise it
609will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 610
ff5dcc92 611On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
612files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
613and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
614called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
615@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
616indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
617to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
618@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
619
620The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
621specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
622was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
623command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
624archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
625the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
626
ff5dcc92 627See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
628archives multiple times.
629
630You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
631
632@ifset GENERIC
633This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 634if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
635behaviour of the AIX linker.
636@end ifset
637
638@cindex search directory, from cmd line
639@kindex -L@var{dir}
640@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
a1ab1d2a 641@item -L@var{searchdir}
252b5132 642@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
643Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
644for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
645option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
646in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
647on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 648@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
252b5132
RH
649order in which the options appear.
650
9c8ebd6a
DJ
651If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
652by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
653
252b5132
RH
654@ifset UsesEnvVars
655The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 656@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
657some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
658@end ifset
659
660The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
661@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
662at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
663
664@cindex emulation
665@kindex -m @var{emulation}
666@item -m@var{emulation}
667Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
668emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
669
670If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
671@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
672
673Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
674configured.
675
676@cindex link map
677@kindex -M
678@kindex --print-map
679@item -M
680@itemx --print-map
681Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
682information about the link, including the following:
683
684@itemize @bullet
685@item
3b83e13a 686Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
687@item
688How common symbols are allocated.
689@item
690All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
691which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
692@item
693The values assigned to symbols.
694
695Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
696involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
697have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
698linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
699of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
700the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
701linker script containing:
702
703@smallexample
704 foo = 1
705 foo = foo * 4
706 foo = foo + 8
707@end smallexample
708
709will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
710option is used:
711
712@smallexample
713 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
714 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
715 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
716@end smallexample
717
718See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
719scripts.
252b5132
RH
720@end itemize
721
722@kindex -n
723@cindex read-only text
724@cindex NMAGIC
725@kindex --nmagic
726@item -n
727@itemx --nmagic
fa19fce0 728Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
a1ab1d2a 729@code{NMAGIC} if possible.
252b5132
RH
730
731@kindex -N
732@kindex --omagic
733@cindex read/write from cmd line
734@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 735@item -N
252b5132
RH
736@itemx --omagic
737Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
738not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
739libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
740mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
741is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
742specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
743
744@kindex --no-omagic
745@cindex OMAGIC
746@item --no-omagic
747This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
748sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
749be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
750shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
751
752@kindex -o @var{output}
753@kindex --output=@var{output}
754@cindex naming the output file
755@item -o @var{output}
756@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 757Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
758option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
759script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
760
761@kindex -O @var{level}
762@cindex generating optimized output
763@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 764If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 765the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
766should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
767option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
768the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
769no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
770of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 771
a712da20
NC
772@kindex -q
773@kindex --emit-relocs
774@cindex retain relocations in final executable
775@item -q
776@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 777Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
778Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
779order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
780in larger executables.
781
dbab7a7b
NC
782This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
783
4f471f39
RS
784@kindex --force-dynamic
785@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
786@item --force-dynamic
787Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
788to VxWorks targets.
789
252b5132
RH
790@cindex partial link
791@cindex relocatable output
792@kindex -r
1049f94e 793@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 794@item -r
1049f94e 795@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 796Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 797turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
798linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
799magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
800@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 801@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
802If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
803linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
804constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
805
62bf86b4
HPN
806When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
807partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
808relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
809example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
810with input files in other formats at all.
811
252b5132
RH
812This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
813
814@kindex -R @var{file}
815@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
816@cindex symbol-only input
817@item -R @var{filename}
818@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
819Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
820relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
821to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
822programs. You may use this option more than once.
823
ff5dcc92 824For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 825followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 826the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
827
828@kindex -s
829@kindex --strip-all
830@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 831@item -s
252b5132
RH
832@itemx --strip-all
833Omit all symbol information from the output file.
834
835@kindex -S
836@kindex --strip-debug
837@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 838@item -S
252b5132
RH
839@itemx --strip-debug
840Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
841
842@kindex -t
843@kindex --trace
844@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 845@item -t
252b5132 846@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 847Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
848
849@kindex -T @var{script}
850@kindex --script=@var{script}
851@cindex script files
852@item -T @var{scriptfile}
853@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
854Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 855@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 856@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
857output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
858the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
859specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
860options accumulate.
252b5132 861
14be8564
L
862@kindex -dT @var{script}
863@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
864@cindex script files
865@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
866@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
867Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
868
869This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
870processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
871command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
872@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
873behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
874command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
875the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
876@samp{gcc}).
877
252b5132
RH
878@kindex -u @var{symbol}
879@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
880@cindex undefined symbol
881@item -u @var{symbol}
882@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
883Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
884symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
885modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
886different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
887option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
888
889@kindex -Ur
890@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 891@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
892For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
893@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 894turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
895@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
896It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
897with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
898be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
899@samp{-r} for the others.
900
577a0623
AM
901@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
902@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
903Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
904@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
905missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
906specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
907multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
908input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
909in a linker script.
a854a4a7 910
252b5132
RH
911@kindex -v
912@kindex -V
913@kindex --version
914@cindex version
915@item -v
916@itemx --version
917@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 918Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
919lists the supported emulations.
920
921@kindex -x
922@kindex --discard-all
923@cindex deleting local symbols
924@item -x
925@itemx --discard-all
926Delete all local symbols.
927
928@kindex -X
929@kindex --discard-locals
930@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 931@item -X
252b5132 932@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
933Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
934system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
935or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
936
937@kindex -y @var{symbol}
938@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
939@cindex symbol tracing
940@item -y @var{symbol}
941@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
942Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
943option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
944to prepend an underscore.
945
946This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
947don't know where the reference is coming from.
948
949@kindex -Y @var{path}
950@item -Y @var{path}
951Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
952for Solaris compatibility.
953
954@kindex -z @var{keyword}
955@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
956The recognized keywords are:
957@table @samp
958
959@item combreloc
960Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
961lookup caching possible.
962
963@item defs
560e09e9 964Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 965shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 966
6aa29e7b
JJ
967@item execstack
968Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
969
cd6d6c15
NC
970@item initfirst
971This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
972It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
973before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
974the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
975the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
976objects.
977
978@item interpose
979Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
980but the primary executable.
981
5fa222e4
AM
982@item lazy
983When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
984dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
985the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
986Lazy binding is the default.
987
cd6d6c15
NC
988@item loadfltr
989Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
990runtime.
991
992@item muldefs
993Allows multiple definitions.
994
995@item nocombreloc
996Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
997
998@item nocopyreloc
999Disables production of copy relocs.
1000
1001@item nodefaultlib
1002Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1003ignore any default library search paths.
1004
1005@item nodelete
1006Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1007
1008@item nodlopen
1009Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1010
1011@item nodump
1012Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1013
6aa29e7b
JJ
1014@item noexecstack
1015Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1016
1017@item norelro
1018Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1019
cd6d6c15
NC
1020@item now
1021When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1022dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1023when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1024deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1025first called.
1026
1027@item origin
1028Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1029
6aa29e7b
JJ
1030@item relro
1031Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1032
24718e3b
L
1033@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1034Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1035
1036@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1037Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1038
cd6d6c15
NC
1039@end table
1040
ece2d90e 1041Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1042
1043@kindex -(
1044@cindex groups of archives
1045@item -( @var{archives} -)
1046@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1047The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1048either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1049
1050The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1051references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1052the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1053archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1054object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1055would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1056they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1057resolved.
1058
1059Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1060it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1061more archives.
1062
69da35b5
NC
1063@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1064@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1065@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1066@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1067Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1068recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1069and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1070the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1071behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1072so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1073restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1074
4a43e768
AM
1075@kindex --as-needed
1076@kindex --no-as-needed
1077@item --as-needed
1078@itemx --no-as-needed
1079This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1080on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1081the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1082on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
77cfaee6
AM
1083needed. @option{--as-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags to only be emitted
1084for libraries that satisfy some symbol reference from regular objects
1085which is undefined at the point that the library was linked.
4a43e768
AM
1086@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1087
e56f61be
L
1088@kindex --add-needed
1089@kindex --no-add-needed
1090@item --add-needed
1091@itemx --no-add-needed
1092This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1093DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1094the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1095a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1096@option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1097for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1098the default behaviour.
1099
252b5132
RH
1100@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1101@item -assert @var{keyword}
1102This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1103
1104@kindex -Bdynamic
1105@kindex -dy
1106@kindex -call_shared
1107@item -Bdynamic
1108@itemx -dy
1109@itemx -call_shared
1110Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1111for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1112default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1113for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1114multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1115@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1116
a1ab1d2a
UD
1117@kindex -Bgroup
1118@item -Bgroup
1119Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1120section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1121object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1122@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1123only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1124
252b5132
RH
1125@kindex -Bstatic
1126@kindex -dn
1127@kindex -non_shared
1128@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1129@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1130@itemx -dn
1131@itemx -non_shared
1132@itemx -static
1133Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1134platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1135variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1136may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1137library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1138option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1139option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1140shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1141references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1142libraries.
252b5132
RH
1143
1144@kindex -Bsymbolic
1145@item -Bsymbolic
1146When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1147definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1148for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1149within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1150platforms which support shared libraries.
1151
40b36307
L
1152@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1153@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1154When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1155symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1156This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1157libraries.
1158
55255dae
L
1159@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1160@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1161Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1162typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1163global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1164within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1165to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1166in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1167which support shared libraries.
1168
1169The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1170scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1171
40b36307
L
1172@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1173@item --dynamic-list-data
1174Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1175
1176@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1177@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1178Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1179is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1180
0b8a70d9
L
1181@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1182@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1183Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1184
252b5132
RH
1185@kindex --check-sections
1186@kindex --no-check-sections
1187@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1188@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1189Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1190been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1191perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1192suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1193allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1194restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
252b5132
RH
1195
1196@cindex cross reference table
1197@kindex --cref
1198@item --cref
1199Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1200generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1201Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1202
1203The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1204easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1205sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1206symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1207definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1208
4818e05f
AM
1209@cindex common allocation
1210@kindex --no-define-common
1211@item --no-define-common
1212This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1213The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1214@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1215
1216The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1217the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1218of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1219forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1220Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1221from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1222This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1223and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1224duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1225paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1226
252b5132
RH
1227@cindex symbols, from command line
1228@kindex --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1229@item --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1230Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1231address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1232times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1233limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1234context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1235symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1236constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1237using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1238Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1239space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1240@var{expression}.
1241
1242@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1243@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1244@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1245@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1246@itemx --no-demangle
1247These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1248and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1249present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1250underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1251mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1252different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1253to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1254demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1255is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1256
1257@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1258@kindex -I@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1259@kindex --dynamic-linker @var{file}
1260@item --dynamic-linker @var{file}
1261Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1262generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1263linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1264doing.
1265
7ce691ae
C
1266
1267@kindex --fatal-warnings
1268@item --fatal-warnings
1269Treat all warnings as errors.
1270
252b5132
RH
1271@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1272@item --force-exe-suffix
1273Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1274
1275If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1276@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1277the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1278option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1279Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1280it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1281
1282@kindex --gc-sections
1283@kindex --no-gc-sections
1284@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1285@item --gc-sections
1286@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1287Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1288targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1289performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1290@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1291
d5465ba2
AM
1292@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1293examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1294symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1295command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1296referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1297libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1298referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1299the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1300relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1301
ac69cbc6
TG
1302This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1303@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1304specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1305a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1306
c17d87de
NC
1307@kindex --print-gc-sections
1308@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1309@cindex garbage collection
1310@item --print-gc-sections
1311@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1312List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1313printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1314collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1315default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1316be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1317line.
1318
252b5132
RH
1319@cindex help
1320@cindex usage
1321@kindex --help
1322@item --help
1323Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1324
ea20a7da
CC
1325@kindex --target-help
1326@item --target-help
1327Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1328
252b5132
RH
1329@kindex -Map
1330@item -Map @var{mapfile}
1331Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1332@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1333
1334@cindex memory usage
1335@kindex --no-keep-memory
1336@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1337@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1338symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1339instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1340necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1341while linking a large executable.
1342
1343@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1344@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1345@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1346@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1347Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1348is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1349The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1350behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1351libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1352
aa713662
L
1353@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1354@kindex -z muldefs
1355@item --allow-multiple-definition
1356@itemx -z muldefs
1357Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1358report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1359first definition will be used.
1360
b79e8c78 1361@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1362@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1363@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1364@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
560e09e9
NC
1365Allows (the default) or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1366This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1367determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1368shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1369how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1370
1371The reason that @option{--allow-shlib-undefined} is the default is that
1372the shared library being specified at link time may not be the same as
1373the one that is available at load time, so the symbols might actually be
ae9a127f 1374resolvable at load time. Plus there are some systems, (eg BeOS) where
560e09e9 1375undefined symbols in shared libraries is normal. (The kernel patches
ece2d90e 1376them at load time to select which function is most appropriate
560e09e9
NC
1377for the current architecture. This is used for example to dynamically
1378select an appropriate memset function). Apparently it is also normal
1379for HPPA shared libraries to have undefined symbols.
b79e8c78 1380
31941635
L
1381@kindex --no-undefined-version
1382@item --no-undefined-version
1383Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1384it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1385will be issued instead.
1386
3e3b46e5
PB
1387@kindex --default-symver
1388@item --default-symver
1389Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1390exported symbols.
1391
1392@kindex --default-imported-symver
1393@item --default-imported-symver
1394Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1395imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1396
252b5132
RH
1397@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1398@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1399Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1400files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1401been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1402This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1403errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1404have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1405inappropriate.
1406
fe7929ce
AM
1407@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1408@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1409Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1410library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1411
252b5132
RH
1412@kindex --no-whole-archive
1413@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1414Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1415archive files.
1416
1417@cindex output file after errors
1418@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1419@item --noinhibit-exec
1420Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1421Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1422errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1423when it issues any error whatsoever.
1424
0a9c1c8e
CD
1425@kindex -nostdlib
1426@item -nostdlib
1427Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1428command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1429(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1430
252b5132
RH
1431@ifclear SingleFormat
1432@kindex --oformat
1433@item --oformat @var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1434@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1435file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1436@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1437object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1438object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1439should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1440usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1441name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1442list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1443command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1444this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1445@end ifclear
1446
36af4a4e
JJ
1447@kindex -pie
1448@kindex --pic-executable
1449@item -pie
1450@itemx --pic-executable
1451@cindex position independent executables
1452Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1453ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1454libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1455address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1456normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1457defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1458
252b5132
RH
1459@kindex -qmagic
1460@item -qmagic
1461This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1462
1463@kindex -Qy
1464@item -Qy
1465This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1466
1467@kindex --relax
1468@cindex synthesizing linker
1469@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1470@item --relax
a1ab1d2a 1471An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1472@ifset GENERIC
1473This option is only supported on a few targets.
1474@end ifset
1475@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1476@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1477@end ifset
1478@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1479@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1480@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1481@ifset XTENSA
1482@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1483@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1484@ifset M68HC11
1485@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1486@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1487@ifset POWERPC
1488@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1489@end ifset
252b5132
RH
1490
1491On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1492optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1493in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1494instructions in the output object file.
1495
1496On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1497debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1498@ifset GENERIC
1499This is known to be
1500the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1501@end ifset
1502
1503@ifset GENERIC
1504On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1505but ignored.
1506@end ifset
1507
1508@cindex retaining specified symbols
1509@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1510@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1511@item --retain-symbols-file @var{filename}
1512Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1513discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1514symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1515@ifset GENERIC
1516(such as VxWorks)
1517@end ifset
1518where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1519run-time memory.
1520
1521@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1522or symbols needed for relocations.
1523
1524You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1525line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1526
1527@ifset GENERIC
1528@item -rpath @var{dir}
1529@cindex runtime library search path
1530@kindex -rpath
1531Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1532linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1533arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1534them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1535also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1536objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1537@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1538ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1539@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1540
ff5dcc92 1541The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1542SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1543@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1544runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1545options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1546gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1547file systems.
252b5132 1548
ff5dcc92 1549For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1550followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1551the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1552@end ifset
1553
1554@ifset GENERIC
1555@cindex link-time runtime library search path
1556@kindex -rpath-link
1557@item -rpath-link @var{DIR}
1558When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1559happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1560of the input files.
1561
1562When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1563non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1564shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1565explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1566specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1567@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1568either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1569appearing multiple times.
1570
28c309a2
NC
1571This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1572that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1573is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1574runtime linker would do.
1575
252b5132 1576The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1577libraries:
252b5132
RH
1578@enumerate
1579@item
ff5dcc92 1580Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1581@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1582Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1583between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1584specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1585used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1586at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1587by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1588the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1589@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1590On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1591@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1592environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1593@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1594On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1595directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1596@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1597For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1598variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1599@item
ec4eb78a
L
1600For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1601@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1602libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1603@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1604@item
252b5132
RH
1605The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1606@item
1607For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1608exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1609@end enumerate
1610
1611If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1612warning and continue with the link.
1613@end ifset
1614
1615@kindex -shared
1616@kindex -Bshareable
1617@item -shared
1618@itemx -Bshareable
1619@cindex shared libraries
1620Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1621and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1622shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1623undefined symbols in the link.
1624
de7dd2bd 1625@item --sort-common [= ascending | descending]
252b5132 1626@kindex --sort-common
de7dd2bd
NC
1627This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1628ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1629sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1630eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1631between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1632specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1633
bcaa7b3e
L
1634@kindex --sort-section name
1635@item --sort-section name
1636This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1637patterns in the linker script.
1638
1639@kindex --sort-section alignment
1640@item --sort-section alignment
1641This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1642patterns in the linker script.
1643
252b5132 1644@kindex --split-by-file
a854a4a7 1645@item --split-by-file [@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1646Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1647each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1648size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1649
1650@kindex --split-by-reloc
a854a4a7
AM
1651@item --split-by-reloc [@var{count}]
1652Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1653output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1654This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1655certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1656cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1657that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1658support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1659input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1660more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1661many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1662
1663@kindex --stats
1664@item --stats
1665Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1666as execution time and memory usage.
1667
e2243057
RS
1668@kindex --sysroot
1669@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1670Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1671configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1672that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1673
252b5132
RH
1674@kindex --traditional-format
1675@cindex traditional format
1676@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1677For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1678the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1679use the traditional format instead.
1680
1681@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1682For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1683symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1684full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1685@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1686trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1687combine duplicate entries.
1688
176355da
NC
1689@kindex --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1690@item --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1691Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1692address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1693times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1694line.
1695@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1696for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1697@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1698should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1699sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1700
252b5132
RH
1701@kindex -Tbss @var{org}
1702@kindex -Tdata @var{org}
1703@kindex -Ttext @var{org}
1704@cindex segment origins, cmd line
1705@item -Tbss @var{org}
1706@itemx -Tdata @var{org}
1707@itemx -Ttext @var{org}
a6e02871
AO
1708Same as --section-start, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1709@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1710
560e09e9
NC
1711@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1712@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1713Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1714values for @samp{method}:
1715
1716@table @samp
1717@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1718Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1719
1720@item report-all
da8bce14 1721Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1722
1723@item ignore-in-object-files
1724Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1725ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1726
1727@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1728Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1729ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1730when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1731libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1732command line.
1733@end table
1734
1735The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1736by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1737
1738Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1739unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1740can change this to a warning.
1741
252b5132
RH
1742@kindex --verbose
1743@cindex verbose
1744@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1745@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1746Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1747supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1748the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1749
1750@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1751@cindex version script, symbol versions
1752@itemx --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1753Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1754used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1755about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
252b5132
RH
1756is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1757@xref{VERSION}.
1758
7ce691ae 1759@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1760@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1761@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1762@item --warn-common
1763Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1764a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1765but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1766you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1767Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1768warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1769
1770There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1771
1772@table @samp
1773@item int i = 1;
1774A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1775file.
1776
1777@item extern int i;
1778An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1779There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1780variable somewhere.
1781
1782@item int i;
1783A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1784variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1785The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1786single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1787size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1788a definition of the same variable.
1789@end table
1790
1791The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1792Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1793just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1794encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1795a common symbol.
1796
1797@enumerate
1798@item
1799Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1800definition for the symbol.
1801@smallexample
1802@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1803 overridden by definition
1804@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1805@end smallexample
1806
1807@item
1808Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1809the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1810except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1811@smallexample
1812@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1813 overriding common
1814@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1815@end smallexample
1816
1817@item
1818Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1819@smallexample
1820@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1821 of `@var{symbol}'
1822@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1823@end smallexample
1824
1825@item
1826Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1827@smallexample
1828@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1829 overridden by larger common
1830@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1831@end smallexample
1832
1833@item
1834Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1835the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1836encountered in a different order.
1837@smallexample
1838@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1839 overriding smaller common
1840@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1841@end smallexample
1842@end enumerate
1843
1844@kindex --warn-constructors
1845@item --warn-constructors
1846Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1847object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1848detect the use of global constructors.
1849
1850@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1851@item --warn-multiple-gp
1852Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1853This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1854Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1855section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1856of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1857base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1858base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1859bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1860large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1861values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1862option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1863
1864@kindex --warn-once
1865@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1866@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1867@item --warn-once
1868Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1869which refers to it.
1870
1871@kindex --warn-section-align
1872@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1873@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1874@item --warn-section-align
1875Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1876alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1877The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1878is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1879the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1880
8fdd7217
NC
1881@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1882@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1883Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1884
560e09e9
NC
1885@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1886@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1887If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1888@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1889This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1890
1891@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1892@item --error-unresolved-symbols
1893This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1894it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1895
252b5132
RH
1896@kindex --whole-archive
1897@cindex including an entire archive
1898@item --whole-archive
1899For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 1900@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
1901in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1902files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1903library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1904library. This option may be used more than once.
1905
7ec229ce 1906Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
1907about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
1908Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
1909list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1910your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1911
252b5132
RH
1912@kindex --wrap
1913@item --wrap @var{symbol}
1914Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
1915@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
1916undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
1917@var{symbol}.
1918
1919This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
1920wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
1921wishes to call the system function, it should call
1922@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
1923
1924Here is a trivial example:
1925
1926@smallexample
1927void *
cc2f008e 1928__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 1929@{
cc2f008e 1930 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
1931 return __real_malloc (c);
1932@}
1933@end smallexample
1934
ff5dcc92 1935If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
1936all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
1937instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
1938call the real @code{malloc} function.
1939
1940You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 1941links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
1942you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
1943file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
1944call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
1945
6aa29e7b
JJ
1946@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
1947@item --eh-frame-hdr
1948Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
1949@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
1950
6c1439be
L
1951@kindex --enable-new-dtags
1952@kindex --disable-new-dtags
1953@item --enable-new-dtags
1954@itemx --disable-new-dtags
1955This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
1956systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
1957@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
1958If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
1959created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
1960those options are only available for ELF systems.
1961
2d643429 1962@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 1963@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
1964Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
1965close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
1966time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
1967increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
1968value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
1969
fdc90cb4
JJ
1970@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
1971@item --hash-style=@var{style}
1972Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
1973@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
1974new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
1975the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
1976hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
1977
35835446
JR
1978@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
1979@item --reduce-memory-overheads
1980This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 1981linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 1982for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
1983about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
1984
4f9c04f7 1985Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 19861021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 1987run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
1988has been used.
1989
1990The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
1991enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 1992
c0065db7
RM
1993@kindex --build-id
1994@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
1995@item --build-id
1996@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
1997Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
1998The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
1999file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2000@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2001parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2002@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2003@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2004an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2005characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2006omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2007
2008The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2009that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2010unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2011to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2012file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2013string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2014
2015Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2016@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2017@end table
2018
0285c67d
NC
2019@c man end
2020
36f63dca 2021@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2022
0285c67d
NC
2023@c man begin OPTIONS
2024
ff5dcc92 2025The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2026the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2027normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2028use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2029@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2030like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2031symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2032object file).
2033
2034In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2035support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2036PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2037values by either a space or an equals sign.
2038
ff5dcc92 2039@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2040
2041@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2042@item --add-stdcall-alias
2043If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2044as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2045[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2046
2047@kindex --base-file
2048@item --base-file @var{file}
2049Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2050addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2051@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2052[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2053
2054@kindex --dll
2055@item --dll
2056Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2057@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2058file.
bb10df36 2059[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2060
2061@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2062@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2063@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2064@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2065If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2066do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2067only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2068resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2069undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2070@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2071to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2072warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2073import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2074to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2075feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2076@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2077mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2078[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2079
2080@cindex DLLs, creating
2081@kindex --export-all-symbols
2082@item --export-all-symbols
2083If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2084be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2085otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2086explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2087attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2088option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2089@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2090@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2091exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2092re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2093such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2094@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2095@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2096Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2097not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2098extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2099(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2100These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2101@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2102@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2103@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2104@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2105[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2106
2107@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2108@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2109Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2110exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2111[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2112
2113@kindex --file-alignment
2114@item --file-alignment
2115Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2116file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2117512.
bb10df36 2118[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2119
2120@cindex heap size
2121@kindex --heap
2122@item --heap @var{reserve}
2123@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2124Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2125to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2126committed.
bb10df36 2127[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2128
2129@cindex image base
2130@kindex --image-base
2131@item --image-base @var{value}
2132Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2133the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2134is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2135your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2136other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2137for dlls.
bb10df36 2138[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2139
2140@kindex --kill-at
2141@item --kill-at
2142If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2143symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2144[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2145
26d2d8a2
BF
2146@kindex --large-address-aware
2147@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2148If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2149header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2150greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2151or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2152section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2153[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2154
252b5132
RH
2155@kindex --major-image-version
2156@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2157Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2158[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2159
2160@kindex --major-os-version
2161@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2162Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2163[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2164
2165@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2166@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2167Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2168[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2169
2170@kindex --minor-image-version
2171@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2172Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2173[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2174
2175@kindex --minor-os-version
2176@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2177Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2178[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2179
2180@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2181@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2182Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2183[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2184
2185@cindex DEF files, creating
2186@cindex DLLs, creating
2187@kindex --output-def
2188@item --output-def @var{file}
2189The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2190file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2191(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2192library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2193automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2194[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2195
b044cda1
CW
2196@cindex DLLs, creating
2197@kindex --out-implib
2198@item --out-implib @var{file}
2199The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2200import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2201import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2202may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2203makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2204creation step.
bb10df36 2205[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2206
2207@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2208@item --enable-auto-image-base
2209Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2210using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2211from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2212collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2213avoided.
bb10df36 2214[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2215
2216@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2217@item --disable-auto-image-base
2218Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2219user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2220default.
bb10df36 2221[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2222
2223@cindex DLLs, linking to
2224@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2225@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2226When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2227search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2228@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2229between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2230uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2231@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2232[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2233
2234@kindex --enable-auto-import
2235@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2236Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2237DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2238building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2239'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2240to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2241specification published by Microsoft.
2242
e2a83dd0
NC
2243Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2244data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2245placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2246around a problem with consts that is described here:
2247http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2248
4d8907ac
DS
2249Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2250see this message:
0d888aac 2251
ece2d90e 2252"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2253documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2254
ece2d90e
NC
2255This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2256ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2257allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2258fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2259constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2260multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2261this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2262of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2263the warning, and exit.
2264
2265There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2266data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2267
2fa9fc65
NC
2268One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2269of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2270this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2271
c0065db7
RM
2272A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2273that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2274there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2275a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2276
2277@example
2278extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2279extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2280 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2281@end example
2282
2283or
2284
2285@example
2286extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2287extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2288 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2289@end example
2290
c0065db7 2291For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2292is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2293
2294@example
2295extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2296extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2297 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2298@end example
2299
c406afaf
NC
2300or
2301
2302@example
2303extern long long extern_ll;
2304extern_ll -->
2305 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2306@end example
2307
2fa9fc65 2308A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2309'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2310@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2311requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2312building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2313merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2314between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2315constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2316
2317Original:
2318@example
2319--foo.h
2320extern int arr[];
2321--foo.c
2322#include "foo.h"
2323void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2324 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2325@}
2326@end example
2327
2328Solution 1:
2329@example
2330--foo.h
2331extern int arr[];
2332--foo.c
2333#include "foo.h"
2334void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2335 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2336 volatile int *parr = arr;
2337 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2338@}
2339@end example
2340
2341Solution 2:
2342@example
2343--foo.h
2344/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2345#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2346 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2347#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2348#else
2349#define FOO_IMPORT
2350#endif
2351extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2352--foo.c
2353#include "foo.h"
2354void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2355 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2356@}
2357@end example
2358
c0065db7 2359A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2360library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2361for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2362functions).
bb10df36 2363[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2364
2365@kindex --disable-auto-import
2366@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2367Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2368@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2369[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2370
2fa9fc65
NC
2371@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2372@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2373If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2374that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2375a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2376environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2377[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2378
2379@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2380@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2381Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2382DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2383[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2384
b044cda1
CW
2385@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2386@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2387Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2388[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2389
252b5132
RH
2390@kindex --section-alignment
2391@item --section-alignment
2392Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2393addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2394[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2395
2396@cindex stack size
2397@kindex --stack
2398@item --stack @var{reserve}
2399@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2400Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2401to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2402committed.
bb10df36 2403[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2404
2405@kindex --subsystem
2406@item --subsystem @var{which}
2407@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2408@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2409Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2410legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2411@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2412the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2413@var{which}.
bb10df36 2414[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2415
2416@end table
2417
0285c67d
NC
2418@c man end
2419
93fd0973
SC
2420@ifset M68HC11
2421@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2422
2423@c man begin OPTIONS
2424
2425The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2426memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2427
2428@table @gcctabopt
2429
2430@kindex --no-trampoline
2431@item --no-trampoline
2432This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2433is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2434instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2435
2436@kindex --bank-window
2437@item --bank-window @var{name}
2438This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2439the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2440The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2441paging and addresses within the memory window.
2442
2443@end table
2444
2445@c man end
2446@end ifset
2447
7fb9f789
NC
2448@ifset M68K
2449@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2450
2451@c man begin OPTIONS
2452
2453The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2454when linking for 68K targets.
2455
2456@table @gcctabopt
2457
2458@kindex --got
2459@item --got=@var{type}
2460This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2461@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2462@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2463Info entry for @file{ld}.
2464
2465@end table
2466
2467@c man end
2468@end ifset
2469
252b5132
RH
2470@ifset UsesEnvVars
2471@node Environment
2472@section Environment Variables
2473
0285c67d
NC
2474@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2475
560e09e9 2476You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2477@ifclear SingleFormat
2478@code{GNUTARGET},
2479@end ifclear
2480@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2481
36f63dca 2482@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2483@kindex GNUTARGET
2484@cindex default input format
2485@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2486use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2487of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2488@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2489of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2490attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2491this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2492there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2493object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2494BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2495in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2496@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2497
2498@kindex LDEMULATION
2499@cindex default emulation
2500@cindex emulation, default
2501@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2502@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2503behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2504available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2505the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2506variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2507linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2508
2509@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2510@cindex demangling, default
2511Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2512@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2513default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2514a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2515may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2516options.
2517
0285c67d
NC
2518@c man end
2519@end ifset
2520
252b5132
RH
2521@node Scripts
2522@chapter Linker Scripts
2523
2524@cindex scripts
2525@cindex linker scripts
2526@cindex command files
2527Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2528written in the linker command language.
2529
2530The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2531the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2532the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2533more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2534direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2535described below.
2536
2537The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2538yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2539linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2540to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2541such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2542
2543You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2544line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2545default linker script.
2546
2547You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2548to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2549Linker Scripts}.
2550
2551@menu
2552* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2553* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2554* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2555* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2556* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2557* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2558* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2559* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2560* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2561* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2562* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2563@end menu
2564
2565@node Basic Script Concepts
2566@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2567@cindex linker script concepts
2568We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2569describe the linker script language.
2570
2571The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2572file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2573@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2574The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2575purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2576among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2577section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2578in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2579
2580Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2581also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2582contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2583the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2584A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2585area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2586loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2587which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2588of debugging information.
2589
2590Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2591first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2592the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2593@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2594section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2595same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2596is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2597(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2598based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2599RAM address would be the VMA.
2600
2601You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2602program with the @samp{-h} option.
2603
2604Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2605@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2606has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2607information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2608will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2609static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2610referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2611
2612You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2613program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2614option.
2615
2616@node Script Format
2617@section Linker Script Format
2618@cindex linker script format
2619Linker scripts are text files.
2620
2621You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2622either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2623symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2624generally ignored.
2625
2626Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2627If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2628otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2629double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2630file name.
2631
2632You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2633@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2634to whitespace.
2635
2636@node Simple Example
2637@section Simple Linker Script Example
2638@cindex linker script example
2639@cindex example of linker script
2640Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2641
2642The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2643@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2644memory layout of the output file.
2645
2646The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2647describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2648code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2649@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2650Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2651your input files.
2652
2653For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
26540x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2655linker script which will do that:
2656@smallexample
2657SECTIONS
2658@{
2659 . = 0x10000;
2660 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2661 . = 0x8000000;
2662 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2663 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2664@}
2665@end smallexample
2666
2667You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2668followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2669descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2670
252b5132
RH
2671The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2672sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2673counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2674other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2675current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2676incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2677@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2678
2679The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2680required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2681after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2682which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2683wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2684means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2685
2686Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2687@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2688@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2689
2690The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2691the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2692at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2693output section, the value of the location counter will be
2694@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2695effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2696immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2697
2698The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2699alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2700example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2701sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2702may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2703sections.
2704
2705That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2706
2707@node Simple Commands
2708@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2709@cindex linker script simple commands
2710In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2711
2712@menu
2713* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2714* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2715@ifclear SingleFormat
2716* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2717@end ifclear
2718
2719* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2720@end menu
2721
2722@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2723@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2724@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2725@cindex start of execution
2726@cindex first instruction
2727@cindex entry point
2728The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2729point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2730entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2731@smallexample
2732ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2733@end smallexample
2734
2735There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2736entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2737stopping when one of them succeeds:
2738@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2739@item
252b5132 2740the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2741@item
252b5132 2742the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2743@item
252b5132 2744the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
a1ab1d2a 2745@item
252b5132 2746the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2747@item
252b5132
RH
2748The address @code{0}.
2749@end itemize
2750
2751@node File Commands
36f63dca 2752@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2753@cindex linker script file commands
2754Several linker script commands deal with files.
2755
2756@table @code
2757@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2758@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2759@cindex including a linker script
2760Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2761be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2762with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
276310 levels deep.
2764
2765@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2766@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2767@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2768@cindex input files in linker scripts
2769@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2770@cindex linker script input object files
2771The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2772in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2773
2774For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2775a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2776then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2777
2778In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2779script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2780
e3f2db7f
AO
2781In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2782with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2783located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2784for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2785open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2786linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2787description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2788
ff5dcc92 2789If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2790name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2791@samp{-l}.
2792
2793When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2794files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2795script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2796
2797@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2798@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2799@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2800@cindex grouping input files
2801The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2802files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2803new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2804in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2805
b717d30e
JJ
2806@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2807@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2808@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2809This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2810commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2811as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2812with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2813when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2814@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2815and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2816setting afterwards.
2817
252b5132
RH
2818@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2819@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 2820@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
2821The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2822@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2823@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2824Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2825precedence.
2826
2827You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2828output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2829
2830@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2831@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2832@cindex library search path in linker script
2833@cindex archive search path in linker script
2834@cindex search path in linker script
2835The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 2836@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
2837@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
2838on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
2839are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
2840the command line option are searched first.
2841
2842@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
2843@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
2844@cindex first input file
2845The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
2846that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
2847though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
2848when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
2849first file.
2850@end table
2851
2852@ifclear SingleFormat
2853@node Format Commands
36f63dca 2854@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
2855A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2856
2857@table @code
2858@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2859@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
2860@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2861@cindex output file format in linker script
2862The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
2863output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 2864exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
2865(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
2866line option takes precedence.
2867
2868You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
2869formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
2870This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
2871desired endianness.
2872
2873If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
2874will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
2875output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
2876used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
2877
2878For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
2879command:
2880@smallexample
2881OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
2882@end smallexample
2883This says that the default format for the output file is
2884@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
2885option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
2886format.
2887
2888@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2889@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2890@cindex input file format in linker script
2891The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
2892files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
2893This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
2894(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
2895is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
2896command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
2897@end table
2898@end ifclear
2899
2900@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 2901@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
2902There are a few other linker scripts commands.
2903
2904@table @code
2905@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
2906@kindex ASSERT
2907@cindex assertion in linker script
2908Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
2909with an error code, and print @var{message}.
2910
2911@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
2912@kindex EXTERN
2913@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
2914Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
2915symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
2916modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
2917each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
2918command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
2919
2920@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2921@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2922@cindex common allocation in linker script
2923This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 2924to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
2925output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
2926
4818e05f
AM
2927@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2928@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2929@cindex common allocation in linker script
2930This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
2931command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
2932to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
2933
53d25da6
AM
2934@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
2935@kindex INSERT
2936@cindex insert user script into default script
2937This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
2938augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
2939inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
2940@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
2941default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
2942sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
2943linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
2944insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
2945linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
2946default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
2947of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
2948to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
2949is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
2950
2951@smallexample
2952SECTIONS
2953@{
2954 OVERLAY :
2955 @{
2956 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
2957 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
2958 @}
2959@}
2960INSERT AFTER .text;
2961@end smallexample
2962
252b5132
RH
2963@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
2964@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
2965@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 2966This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
2967references among certain output sections.
2968
2969In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
2970using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
2971will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
2972errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
2973a function defined in the other section.
2974
2975The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 2976@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
2977an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
2978@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
2979names.
2980
2981@ifclear SingleFormat
2982@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
2983@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
2984@cindex machine architecture
2985@cindex architecture
2986Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
2987of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
2988architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
2989the @samp{-f} option.
2990@end ifclear
2991@end table
2992
2993@node Assignments
2994@section Assigning Values to Symbols
2995@cindex assignment in scripts
2996@cindex symbol definition, scripts
2997@cindex variables, defining
2998You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 2999the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3000
3001@menu
3002* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3003* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3004* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3005* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3006@end menu
3007
3008@node Simple Assignments
3009@subsection Simple Assignments
3010
3011You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3012
3013@table @code
3014@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3015@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3016@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3017@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3018@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3019@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3020@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3021@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3022@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3023@end table
3024
3025The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3026@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3027defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3028
3029The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3030may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3031
3032The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3033
3034Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3035
3036You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3037statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3038section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3039
3040The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3041expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3042
3043Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3044assignments may be used:
3045
3046@smallexample
3047floating_point = 0;
3048SECTIONS
3049@{
3050 .text :
3051 @{
3052 *(.text)
3053 _etext = .;
3054 @}
156e34dd 3055 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3056 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3057@}
3058@end smallexample
3059@noindent
3060In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3061zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3062the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3063defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3064upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3065
3066@node PROVIDE
3067@subsection PROVIDE
3068@cindex PROVIDE
3069In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3070only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3071the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3072@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3073@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3074@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3075@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3076@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3077
3078Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3079@smallexample
3080SECTIONS
3081@{
3082 .text :
3083 @{
3084 *(.text)
3085 _etext = .;
3086 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3087 @}
3088@}
3089@end smallexample
3090
3091In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3092underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3093the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3094underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3095If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3096linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3097
7af8e998
L
3098@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3099@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3100@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3101Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3102hidden and won't be exported.
3103
73ae6183
NC
3104@node Source Code Reference
3105@subsection Source Code Reference
3106
3107Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3108intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3109a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3110symbol that does not have a value.
3111
3112Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3113transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3114stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3115prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3116mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3117of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3118variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3119linker script variable might be referred to as:
3120
3121@smallexample
3122 extern int foo;
3123@end smallexample
3124
3125But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3126
3127@smallexample
3128 _foo = 1000;
3129@end smallexample
3130
3131In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3132transformation has taken place.
3133
3134When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3135things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3136in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3137second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3138table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3139contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3140value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3141
3142@smallexample
3143 int foo = 1000;
3144@end smallexample
3145
3146creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3147holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3148number 1000 is initially stored.
3149
3150When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3151first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3152memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3153So:
3154
3155@smallexample
3156 foo = 1;
3157@end smallexample
3158
3159looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3160associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3161address. Whereas:
3162
3163@smallexample
3164 int * a = & foo;
3165@end smallexample
3166
3167looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3168and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3169the variable @samp{a}.
3170
3171Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3172the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3173an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3174
3175@smallexample
3176 foo = 1000;
3177@end smallexample
3178
3179creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3180the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3181address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3182linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3183access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3184
3185Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3186you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3187use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3188section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3189linker script contains these declarations:
3190
3191@smallexample
3192@group
3193 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3194 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3195 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3196@end group
3197@end smallexample
3198
3199Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3200
3201@smallexample
3202@group
3203 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3204
73ae6183
NC
3205 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3206@end group
3207@end smallexample
3208
3209Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3210
252b5132 3211@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3212@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3213@kindex SECTIONS
3214The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3215into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3216
3217The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3218@smallexample
3219SECTIONS
3220@{
3221 @var{sections-command}
3222 @var{sections-command}
3223 @dots{}
3224@}
3225@end smallexample
3226
3227Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3228
3229@itemize @bullet
3230@item
3231an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3232@item
3233a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3234@item
3235an output section description
3236@item
3237an overlay description
3238@end itemize
3239
3240The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3241@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3242those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3243understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3244the layout of the output file.
3245
3246Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3247below.
3248
3249If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3250linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3251section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3252input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3253example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3254in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3255
3256@menu
3257* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3258* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3259* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3260* Input Section:: Input section description
3261* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3262* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3263* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3264* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3265* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3266@end menu
3267
3268@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3269@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3270The full description of an output section looks like this:
3271@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3272@group
7e7d5768 3273@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3274 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3275 @{
3276 @var{output-section-command}
3277 @var{output-section-command}
3278 @dots{}
562d3460 3279 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3280@end group
3281@end smallexample
3282
3283Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3284
3285The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3286name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3287The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3288
3289Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3290
3291@itemize @bullet
3292@item
3293a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3294@item
3295an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3296@item
3297data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3298@item
3299a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3300@end itemize
3301
3302@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3303@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3304@cindex name, section
3305@cindex section name
3306The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3307meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3308support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3309must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3310example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3311output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3312names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3313quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3314characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3315commas must be quoted.
3316
3317The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3318Discarding}.
3319
3320@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3321@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3322@cindex address, section
3323@cindex section address
3324The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3325address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3326the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3327based on the current value of the location counter.
3328
3329If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3330set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3331@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3332current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3333requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3334output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3335within the output section.
3336
3337For example,
3338@smallexample
3339.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3340@end smallexample
3341@noindent
3342and
3343@smallexample
3344.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3345@end smallexample
3346@noindent
3347are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3348@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3349counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3350counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3351section.
3352
3353The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3354For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3355so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3356do something like this:
3357@smallexample
3358.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3359@end smallexample
3360@noindent
3361This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3362aligned upward to the specified value.
3363
3364Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3365location counter.
3366
3367@node Input Section
36f63dca 3368@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3369@cindex input sections
3370@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3371The most common output section command is an input section description.
3372
3373The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3374You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3375in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3376map the input files into your memory layout.
3377
3378@menu
3379* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3380* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3381* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3382* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3383* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3384@end menu
3385
3386@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3387@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3388@cindex input section basics
3389An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3390by a list of section names in parentheses.
3391
3392The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3393describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3394
3395The most common input section description is to include all input
3396sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3397include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3398@smallexample
3399*(.text)
3400@end smallexample
3401@noindent
18625d54
CM
3402Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3403of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3404match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3405example:
252b5132 3406@smallexample
b4346c09 3407*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3408@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3409will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3410@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3411
3412There are two ways to include more than one section:
3413@smallexample
3414*(.text .rdata)
3415*(.text) *(.rdata)
3416@end smallexample
3417@noindent
3418The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3419@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3420first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3421they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3422@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3423@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3424
3425You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3426You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3427needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3428@smallexample
3429data.o(.data)
3430@end smallexample
3431
3432If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3433the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3434commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3435@smallexample
3436data.o
3437@end smallexample
3438
3439When you use a file name which does not contain any wild card
3440characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3441name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3442did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3443though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3444@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3445the archive search path.
3446
3447@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3448@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3449@cindex input section wildcards
3450@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3451@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3452@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3453In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3454name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3455
3456The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3457pattern for the file name.
3458
3459The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3460
3461@table @samp
3462@item *
3463matches any number of characters
3464@item ?
3465matches any single character
3466@item [@var{chars}]
3467matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3468character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3469@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3470@item \
3471quotes the following character
3472@end table
3473
3474When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3475will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3476Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3477exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3478@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3479a @samp{/} character.
3480
3481File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3482specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3483does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3484
3485If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3486appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3487will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3488sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3489@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3490@smallexample
3491.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3492.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3493@end smallexample
3494
bcaa7b3e 3495@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3496Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3497in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3498this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3499pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3500@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3501into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3502
bcaa7b3e
L
3503@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3504@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3505difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3506ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3507
3508@cindex SORT
3509@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3510
3511When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3512can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3513
3514@enumerate
3515@item
3516@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3517It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3518sections have the same name.
3519@item
3520@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3521It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3522sections have the same alignment.
3523@item
c0065db7 3524@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3525treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3526@item
3527@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3528is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3529@item
3530All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3531@end enumerate
3532
3533When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3534section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3535takes precedence over the command line option.
3536
3537If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3538command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3539treated as nested sorting command.
3540
3541@enumerate
3542@item
3543@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3544@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3545@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3546@item
3547@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3548@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3549@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3550@end enumerate
3551
3552If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3553command line option will be ignored.
3554
252b5132
RH
3555If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3556@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3557precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3558
3559This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3560files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3561sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3562The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3563with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3564linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3565@smallexample
3566@group
3567SECTIONS @{
3568 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3569 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3570 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3571 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3572@}
3573@end group
3574@end smallexample
3575
3576@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3577@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3578@cindex common symbol placement
3579@cindex uninitialized data placement
3580A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3581file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3582linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3583named @samp{COMMON}.
3584
3585You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3586other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3587particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3588input files are placed in another section.
3589
3590In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3591@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3592@smallexample
3593.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3594@end smallexample
3595
3596@cindex scommon section
3597@cindex small common symbols
3598Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3599example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3600symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3601different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3602the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3603symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3604to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3605locations.
3606
3607@cindex [COMMON]
3608You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3609notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3610@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3611
3612@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3613@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3614@cindex KEEP
3615@cindex garbage collection
3616When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 3617it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
3618This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3619with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 3620@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
3621
3622@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 3623@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
3624The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3625to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3626start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3627@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3628follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3629@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3630@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3631All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3632files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3633
3634@smallexample
3635@group
3636SECTIONS @{
3637 outputa 0x10000 :
3638 @{
3639 all.o
3640 foo.o (.input1)
3641 @}
36f63dca
NC
3642@end group
3643@group
252b5132
RH
3644 outputb :
3645 @{
3646 foo.o (.input2)
3647 foo1.o (.input1)
3648 @}
36f63dca
NC
3649@end group
3650@group
252b5132
RH
3651 outputc :
3652 @{
3653 *(.input1)
3654 *(.input2)
3655 @}
3656@}
3657@end group
a1ab1d2a 3658@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
3659
3660@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 3661@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
3662@cindex data
3663@cindex section data
3664@cindex output section data
3665@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
3666@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
3667@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
3668@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
3669@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
3670You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3671@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
3672an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
3673parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
3674value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
3675counter.
3676
3677The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
3678store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
3679bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
3680stored.
3681
3682For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
3683of the symbol @samp{addr}:
3684@smallexample
3685BYTE(1)
3686LONG(addr)
3687@end smallexample
3688
3689When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
3690same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
3691target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
3692@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
3693@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
3694
3695If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
3696which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
3697When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
3698true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
3699endianness of the first input object file.
3700
36f63dca 3701Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
3702between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
3703@smallexample
3704SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3705@end smallexample
3706whereas this will work:
3707@smallexample
3708SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3709@end smallexample
3710
252b5132
RH
3711@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
3712@cindex holes, filling
3713@cindex unspecified memory
3714You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
3715current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
3716otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
3717gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 3718with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
3719necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
3720point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
3721than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
3722different parts of an output section.
3723
3724This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 3725value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 3726@smallexample
563e308f 3727FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
3728@end smallexample
3729
3730The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 3731section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
3732part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
3733entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 3734precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 3735expression.
252b5132
RH
3736
3737@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 3738@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
3739There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
3740commands.
3741
3742@table @code
3743@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
3744@cindex input filename symbols
3745@cindex filename symbols
3746@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
3747The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
3748The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
3749file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
3750the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
3751
3752This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
3753normally used for any other object file format.
3754
3755@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
3756@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
3757@cindex constructors, arranging in link
3758@item CONSTRUCTORS
3759When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
3760unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
3761destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
3762arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
3763automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
3764For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
3765linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
3766@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
3767ignored for other object file formats.
3768
3769The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
3770constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
3771Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
3772the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
3773first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
3774of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
3775compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
3776formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
3777@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
3778the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
3779destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
3780@code{exit}.
3781
3782For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
3783arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
3784addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
3785and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
3786linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
3787runtime code expects to see.
3788
3789@smallexample
3790 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
3791 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3792 *(.ctors)
3793 LONG(0)
3794 __CTOR_END__ = .;
3795 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
3796 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3797 *(.dtors)
3798 LONG(0)
3799 __DTOR_END__ = .;
3800@end smallexample
3801
3802If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
3803which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
3804are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
3805are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
3806command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
3807@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
3808@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
3809@samp{*(.dtors)}.
3810
3811Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
3812and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
3813need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
3814scripts.
3815
3816@end table
3817
3818@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 3819@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
3820@cindex discarding sections
3821@cindex sections, discarding
3822@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
3823The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
3824for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
3825be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 3826@smallexample
49c13adb 3827.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
3828@end smallexample
3829@noindent
3830will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
3831@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
3832sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
3833space in an output section will also create the output section.
3834
a0976ea4 3835The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
3836on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
3837symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
3838the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
3839section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
3840
3841@cindex /DISCARD/
3842The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
3843input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
3844section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
3845
3846@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 3847@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
3848@cindex output section attributes
3849We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
3850like this:
3851@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3852@group
7e7d5768 3853@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3854 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3855 @{
3856 @var{output-section-command}
3857 @var{output-section-command}
3858 @dots{}
562d3460 3859 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3860@end group
3861@end smallexample
3862We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
3863@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
3864remaining section attributes.
3865
a1ab1d2a 3866@menu
252b5132
RH
3867* Output Section Type:: Output section type
3868* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 3869* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 3870* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
252b5132
RH
3871* Output Section Region:: Output section region
3872* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
3873* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
3874@end menu
3875
3876@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 3877@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
3878Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
3879parentheses. The following types are defined:
3880
3881@table @code
3882@item NOLOAD
3883The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
3884loaded into memory when the program is run.
3885@item DSECT
3886@itemx COPY
3887@itemx INFO
3888@itemx OVERLAY
3889These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
3890rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
3891marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
3892section when the program is run.
3893@end table
3894
3895@kindex NOLOAD
3896@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
3897@cindex loading, preventing
3898The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
3899the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
3900the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
3901@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
3902need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
3903@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
3904@smallexample
3905@group
3906SECTIONS @{
3907 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
3908 @dots{}
3909@}
3910@end group
3911@end smallexample
3912
3913@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 3914@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 3915@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
3916@kindex AT(@var{lma})
3917@cindex load address
3918@cindex section load address
3919Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
3920@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
3921an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
3922Address}).
3923
dc0b6aa0
AM
3924The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
3925the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
3926
3927Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
3928specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
3929Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
3930linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
3931
3932If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
3933section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
3934VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
3935section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
3936or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
3937to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 3938@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
3939
3940@cindex ROM initialized data
3941@cindex initialized data in ROM
3942This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
3943example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
3944called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
3945@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
3946even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
3947uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
3948defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
3949counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
3950
3951@smallexample
3952@group
3953SECTIONS
3954 @{
3955 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 3956 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
3957 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
3958 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
3959 .bss 0x3000 :
3960 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
3961@}
3962@end group
3963@end smallexample
3964
3965The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
3966this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
3967the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
3968how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
3969script.
3970
3971@smallexample
3972@group
3973extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
3974char *src = &_etext;
3975char *dst = &_data;
3976
3977/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
3978while (dst < &_edata) @{
3979 *dst++ = *src++;
3980@}
3981
3982/* Zero bss */
3983for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
3984 *dst = 0;
3985@end group
3986@end smallexample
3987
bbf115d3
L
3988@node Forced Output Alignment
3989@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
3990@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
3991@cindex forcing output section alignment
3992@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 3993You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 3994
7e7d5768
AM
3995@node Forced Input Alignment
3996@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
3997@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
3998@cindex forcing input section alignment
3999@cindex input section alignment
4000You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4001SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4002sections, whether larger or smaller.
4003
252b5132 4004@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4005@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4006@kindex >@var{region}
4007@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4008@cindex memory regions and sections
4009You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4010using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4011
4012Here is a simple example:
4013@smallexample
4014@group
4015MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4016SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4017@end group
4018@end smallexample
4019
4020@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4021@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4022@kindex :@var{phdr}
4023@cindex section, assigning to program header
4024@cindex program headers and sections
4025You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4026using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4027one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4028assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4029@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4030linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4031
4032Here is a simple example:
4033@smallexample
4034@group
4035PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4036SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4037@end group
4038@end smallexample
4039
4040@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4041@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4042@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4043@cindex section fill pattern
4044@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4045You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4046@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4047(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4048within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4049alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4050necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4051of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4052an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4053fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4054other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4055pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4056expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4057
4058You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4059output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4060
4061Here is a simple example:
4062@smallexample
4063@group
563e308f 4064SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4065@end group
4066@end smallexample
4067
4068@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4069@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4070@kindex OVERLAY
4071@cindex overlays
4072An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4073are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4074the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4075copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4076required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4077can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4078than another.
4079
4080Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4081@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4082output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4083command is as follows:
4084@smallexample
4085@group
4086OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4087 @{
4088 @var{secname1}
4089 @{
4090 @var{output-section-command}
4091 @var{output-section-command}
4092 @dots{}
4093 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4094 @var{secname2}
4095 @{
4096 @var{output-section-command}
4097 @var{output-section-command}
4098 @dots{}
4099 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4100 @dots{}
4101 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4102@end group
4103@end smallexample
4104
4105Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4106section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4107section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4108those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4109except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4110sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4111
4112The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4113addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4114memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4115whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4116and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4117and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4118
4119If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4120among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4121all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4122section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4123NOCROSSREFS}.
4124
4125For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4126provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4127defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4128@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4129the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4130within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4131symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4132
4133At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4134the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4135
4136Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4137@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4138@smallexample
4139@group
4140 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4141 @{
4142 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4143 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4144 @}
4145@end group
4146@end smallexample
4147@noindent
4148This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4149address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4150@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4151following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4152@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4153@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4154
4155C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4156like the following.
4157
4158@smallexample
4159@group
4160 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4161 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4162 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4163@end group
4164@end smallexample
4165
4166Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4167everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4168example could have been written identically as follows.
4169
4170@smallexample
4171@group
4172 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4173 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4174 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4175 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4176 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4177 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4178 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4179@end group
4180@end smallexample
4181
4182@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4183@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4184@kindex MEMORY
4185@cindex memory regions
4186@cindex regions of memory
4187@cindex allocating memory
4188@cindex discontinuous memory
4189The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4190memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4191
4192The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4193memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4194may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4195can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4196set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4197regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4198around to fit into the available regions.
4199
4200A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4201command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4202you wish. The syntax is:
4203@smallexample
4204@group
a1ab1d2a 4205MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4206 @{
4207 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4208 @dots{}
4209 @}
4210@end group
4211@end smallexample
4212
4213The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4214region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4215Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4216with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4217must have a distinct name.
4218
4219@cindex memory region attributes
4220The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4221whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4222not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4223@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4224section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4225the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4226them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4227
4228The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4229@table @samp
4230@item R
4231Read-only section
4232@item W
4233Read/write section
4234@item X
4235Executable section
4236@item A
4237Allocatable section
4238@item I
4239Initialized section
4240@item L
4241Same as @samp{I}
4242@item !
4243Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4244@end table
4245
4246If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4247@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4248attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4249in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4250attributes.
4251
4252@kindex ORIGIN =
4253@kindex o =
4254@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4255The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4256the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4257cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4258abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4259@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4260
4261@kindex LENGTH =
4262@kindex len =
4263@kindex l =
4264The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4265region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4266be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4267@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4268
4269In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4270available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4271and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4272linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4273is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4274or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4275explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4276region.
4277
4278@smallexample
4279@group
a1ab1d2a 4280MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4281 @{
4282 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4283 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4284 @}
4285@end group
4286@end smallexample
4287
4288Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4289specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4290@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4291a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4292output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4293was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4294the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4295output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4296region, the linker will issue an error message.
4297
3ec57632 4298It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4299expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4300@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4301
4302@smallexample
4303@group
c0065db7 4304 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4305@end group
4306@end smallexample
4307
252b5132
RH
4308@node PHDRS
4309@section PHDRS Command
4310@kindex PHDRS
4311@cindex program headers
4312@cindex ELF program headers
4313@cindex program segments
4314@cindex segments, ELF
4315The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4316@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4317loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4318program with the @samp{-p} option.
4319
4320When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4321reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4322program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4323This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4324interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4325
4326The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4327in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4328precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4329the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4330not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4331
4332The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4333generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4334ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4335
4336This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4337@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4338
4339@smallexample
4340@group
4341PHDRS
4342@{
4343 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4344 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4345@}
4346@end group
4347@end smallexample
4348
4349The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4350of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4351header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4352with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4353must have a distinct name.
4354
4355Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4356system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4357specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4358sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4359attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4360Section Phdr}.
4361
4362It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4363merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4364repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4365contain the section.
4366
4367If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4368then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4369not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4370convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4371placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4372default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4373segment at all.
4374
4375@kindex FILEHDR
4376@kindex PHDRS
4377You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
4378the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4379The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4380file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4381include the ELF program headers themselves.
4382
4383The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4384value of the keyword.
4385
4386@table @asis
4387@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4388Indicates an unused program header.
4389
4390@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4391Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4392the file.
4393
4394@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4395Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4396
4397@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4398Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4399found.
4400
4401@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4402Indicates a segment holding note information.
4403
4404@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4405A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4406ABI.
4407
4408@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4409Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4410
4411@item @var{expression}
4412An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4413be used for types not defined above.
4414@end table
4415
4416You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4417in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4418@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4419Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4420output section attribute.
4421
4422The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4423which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4424explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4425an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4426header.
4427
4428Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4429headers used on a native ELF system.
4430
4431@example
4432@group
4433PHDRS
4434@{
4435 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4436 interp PT_INTERP ;
4437 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4438 data PT_LOAD ;
4439 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4440@}
4441
4442SECTIONS
4443@{
4444 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4445 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4446 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4447 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4448 @dots{}
4449 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4450 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4451 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4452 @dots{}
4453@}
4454@end group
4455@end example
4456
4457@node VERSION
4458@section VERSION Command
4459@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4460@cindex symbol versions
4461@cindex version script
4462@cindex versions of symbols
4463The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4464only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4465symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4466a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4467shared library.
4468
4469You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4470you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4471also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4472
4473The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4474@smallexample
4475VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4476@end smallexample
4477
4478The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4479Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4480version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4481version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4482version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4483scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4484library.
4485
4486The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4487examples.
4488
4489@smallexample
4490VERS_1.1 @{
4491 global:
4492 foo1;
4493 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4494 old*;
4495 original*;
4496 new*;
252b5132
RH
4497@};
4498
4499VERS_1.2 @{
4500 foo2;
4501@} VERS_1.1;
4502
4503VERS_2.0 @{
4504 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4505 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb
MM
4506 ns::*;
4507 "int f(int, double)";
c0065db7 4508 @}
252b5132
RH
4509@} VERS_1.2;
4510@end smallexample
4511
4512This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4513version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4514The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4515a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4516of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4517symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4518is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4519in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4520However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4521name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4522
4523Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4524depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4525to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4526
4527Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4528depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4529and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4530
4531When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4532specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4533unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4534unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
252b5132
RH
4535somewhere in the version script.
4536
4537The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4538they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4539could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4540However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4541
0f6bf451 4542Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4543in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4544symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4545won't.
4546
4547@smallexample
7c9c73be 4548@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4549@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4550
252b5132
RH
4551When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4552symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4553requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4554shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4555loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4556linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4557application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4558way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4559all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4560search for each symbol reference.
4561
4562The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4563doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4564that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4565functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4566the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4567required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4568that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4569versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4570the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4571
4572There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4573first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4574source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4575script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4576maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4577@smallexample
4578__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4579@end smallexample
4580@noindent
4581in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4582be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4583The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4584@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4585takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4586
4587The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4588function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4589an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4590version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4591linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4592
4593To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4594source file. Here is an example:
4595
4596@smallexample
4597__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4598__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4599__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4600__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4601@end smallexample
4602
4603In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4604unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4605example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4606@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4607
4608When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4609some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4610this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4611@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4612declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4613you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4614
4615If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4616within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 4617(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
4618specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4619
cb840a31
L
4620You can also specify the language in the version script:
4621
4622@smallexample
4623VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4624@end smallexample
4625
c0065db7 4626The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
4627The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
4628demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
4629patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
4630
86043bbb
MM
4631Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
4632described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4633or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
4634the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4635whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
4636cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
4637might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
4638should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
4639expect when you upgrade.
4640
252b5132
RH
4641@node Expressions
4642@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
4643@cindex expressions
4644@cindex arithmetic
4645The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
4646that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
4647expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
4648host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
4649
4650You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
4651
4652The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
4653expressions.
4654
4655@menu
4656* Constants:: Constants
4657* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 4658* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
4659* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
4660* Operators:: Operators
4661* Evaluation:: Evaluation
4662* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
4663* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
4664@end menu
4665
4666@node Constants
4667@subsection Constants
4668@cindex integer notation
4669@cindex constants in linker scripts
4670All constants are integers.
4671
4672As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
4673octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
4674hexadecimal. The linker considers other integers to be decimal.
4675
4676@cindex scaled integers
4677@cindex K and M integer suffixes
4678@cindex M and K integer suffixes
4679@cindex suffixes for integers
4680@cindex integer suffixes
4681In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
4682constant by
4683@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4684@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4685@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4686@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
4687@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4688@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4689@tex
4690${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
4691@end tex
4692@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4693respectively. For example, the following all refer to the same quantity:
4694@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4695_fourk_1 = 4K;
4696_fourk_2 = 4096;
4697_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
252b5132
RH
4698@end smallexample
4699
4700@node Symbols
4701@subsection Symbol Names
4702@cindex symbol names
4703@cindex names
4704@cindex quoted symbol names
4705@kindex "
4706Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
4707and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
4708Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
4709specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
4710keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
4711@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4712"SECTION" = 9;
4713"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
4714@end smallexample
4715
4716Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
4717to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
4718whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
4719
ecca9871
L
4720@node Orphan Sections
4721@subsection Orphan Sections
4722@cindex orphan
4723Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
4724are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
4725script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
4726output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
4727placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
4728attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
4729same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
4730If there is not enough room to do this then it places
4731at the end of the file.
4732
4733For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
4734well as section flag.
4735
41911f68
NC
4736If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
4737the linker will automatically @xref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
4738__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
4739section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
4740orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
4741representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
4742character.
4743
252b5132
RH
4744@node Location Counter
4745@subsection The Location Counter
4746@kindex .
4747@cindex dot
4748@cindex location counter
4749@cindex current output location
4750The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
4751current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
4752location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
4753within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
4754anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
4755
4756@cindex holes
4757Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
4758moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
4759location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
4760and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
4761doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
4762
4763@smallexample
4764SECTIONS
4765@{
4766 output :
4767 @{
4768 file1(.text)
4769 . = . + 1000;
4770 file2(.text)
4771 . += 1000;
4772 file3(.text)
563e308f 4773 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
4774@}
4775@end smallexample
4776@noindent
4777In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
4778located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
4779followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
4780@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 4781@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
4782specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
4783
5c6bbab8
NC
4784@cindex dot inside sections
4785Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
4786current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 4787statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
4788absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
4789however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
4790not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
4791
4792@smallexample
4793SECTIONS
4794@{
4795 . = 0x100
4796 .text: @{
4797 *(.text)
4798 . = 0x200
4799 @}
4800 . = 0x500
4801 .data: @{
4802 *(.data)
4803 . += 0x600
4804 @}
4805@}
4806@end smallexample
4807
4808The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
4809and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
4810the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
4811much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
4812move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
4813and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
4814the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
4815the @samp{.data} output section itself.
4816
b5666f2f
AM
4817@cindex dot outside sections
4818Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
4819output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
4820needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
4821
4822@smallexample
4823SECTIONS
4824@{
4825 start_of_text = . ;
4826 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4827 end_of_text = . ;
4828
4829 start_of_data = . ;
4830 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4831 end_of_data = . ;
4832@}
4833@end smallexample
4834
4835If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
4836not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
4837between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
4838should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
4839blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
4840the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
4841sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
4842statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
4843special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
4844place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
4845as follows:
4846
4847@smallexample
4848SECTIONS
4849@{
4850 start_of_text = . ;
4851 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4852 end_of_text = . ;
4853
4854 start_of_data = . ;
4855 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
4856 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4857 end_of_data = . ;
4858@}
4859@end smallexample
4860
4861This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
4862@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
4863placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
4864assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
4865a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
4866section. So you could write:
4867
4868@smallexample
4869SECTIONS
4870@{
4871 start_of_text = . ;
4872 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4873 end_of_text = . ;
4874
4875 . = . ;
4876 start_of_data = . ;
4877 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4878 end_of_data = . ;
4879@}
4880@end smallexample
4881
4882Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
4883@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
4884
252b5132
RH
4885@need 2000
4886@node Operators
4887@subsection Operators
4888@cindex operators for arithmetic
4889@cindex arithmetic operators
4890@cindex precedence in expressions
4891The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
4892the standard bindings and precedence levels:
4893@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4894@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4895@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4896@smallexample
4897precedence associativity Operators Notes
4898(highest)
48991 left ! - ~ (1)
49002 left * / %
49013 left + -
49024 left >> <<
49035 left == != > < <= >=
49046 left &
49057 left |
49068 left &&
49079 left ||
490810 right ? :
490911 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
4910(lowest)
4911@end smallexample
4912Notes:
a1ab1d2a 4913(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
4914(2) @xref{Assignments}.
4915@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4916@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4917@tex
4918\vskip \baselineskip
4919%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
4920\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
4921\hrule
4922\halign
4923{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
4924height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4925&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
4926height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4927\noalign{\hrule}
4928height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4929&highest&&&&&\cr
4930% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 4931&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
4932&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
4933&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
4934&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
4935&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
4936&6&&left&&\&&\cr
4937&7&&left&&|&\cr
4938&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
4939&9&&left&&||&\cr
4940&10&&right&&? :&\cr
4941&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
4942&lowest&&&&&\cr
4943height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
4944\hrule}
4945@end tex
4946@iftex
4947{
4948@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
4949@dag@quad Prefix operators.
4950@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
4951}
4952@end iftex
4953@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4954
4955@node Evaluation
4956@subsection Evaluation
4957@cindex lazy evaluation
4958@cindex expression evaluation order
4959The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
4960an expression when absolutely necessary.
4961
4962The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
4963address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
4964regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
4965as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
4966
4967However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
4968until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
4969other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
4970for use in the symbol assignment expression.
4971
4972The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
4973assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
4974allocation.
4975
4976Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
4977@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
4978
4979If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
4980available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
4981following
4982@smallexample
4983@group
4984SECTIONS
4985 @{
a1ab1d2a 4986 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
4987 @{ *(.text) @}
4988 @}
4989@end group
4990@end smallexample
4991@noindent
4992will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
4993address}.
4994
4995@node Expression Section
4996@subsection The Section of an Expression
4997@cindex expression sections
4998@cindex absolute expressions
4999@cindex relative expressions
5000@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5001@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5002@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5003When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5004or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5005fixed offset from the base of a section.
5006
5007The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5008whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5009an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5010section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5011
5012A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5013relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5014further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5015section will be the section of the relative expression.
5016
5017A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5018through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5019will not have any particular associated section.
5020
5021You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5022to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5023create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5024section @samp{.data}:
5025@smallexample
5026SECTIONS
5027 @{
5028 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5029 @}
5030@end smallexample
5031@noindent
5032If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5033@samp{.data} section.
5034
5035@node Builtin Functions
5036@subsection Builtin Functions
5037@cindex functions in expressions
5038The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5039use in linker script expressions.
5040
5041@table @code
5042@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5043@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5044@cindex expression, absolute
5045Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5046of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5047value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5048normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5049
5050@item ADDR(@var{section})
5051@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5052@cindex section address in expression
5053Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5054script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5055the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5056identical values:
5057@smallexample
5058@group
5059SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5060 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5061 @{
252b5132
RH
5062 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5063 @dots{}
5064 @}
5065 .output :
5066 @{
5067 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5068 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5069 @}
5070@dots{} @}
5071@end group
5072@end smallexample
5073
876f4090
NS
5074@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5075@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5076@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5077@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5078@cindex round up location counter
5079@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5080@cindex round up expression
5081@cindex align expression
5082Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5083to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5084doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5085arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5086expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5087equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5088
5089Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5090next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5091variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5092input sections:
252b5132
RH
5093@smallexample
5094@group
5095SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5096 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5097 *(.data)
5098 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5099 @}
5100@dots{} @}
5101@end group
5102@end smallexample
5103@noindent
5104The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5105a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5106a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5107of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5108
5109The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5110
362c1d1a
NS
5111@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5112@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5113@cindex section alignment
5114Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5115been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5116evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5117the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5118value in that section.
5119@smallexample
5120@group
5121SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5122 .output @{
5123 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5124 @dots{}
5125 @}
5126@dots{} @}
5127@end group
5128@end smallexample
5129
252b5132
RH
5130@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5131@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5132This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5133scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5134section.
5135
2d20f7bf
JJ
5136@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5137@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5138This is equivalent to either
5139@smallexample
5140(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5141@end smallexample
5142or
5143@smallexample
5144(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5145@end smallexample
5146@noindent
5147depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5148for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5149@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5150If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5151memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5152bytes in the on-disk file.
5153
5154This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5155any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5156@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5157be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5158working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5159
5160@noindent
5161Example:
5162@smallexample
5163 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5164@end smallexample
5165
5166@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5167@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5168This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5169evaluation purposes.
5170
5171@smallexample
5172 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5173@end smallexample
5174
a4f5ad88
JJ
5175@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5176@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5177This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5178@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5179When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5180does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5181@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5182boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5183it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5184@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5185
5186@smallexample
5187 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5188@end smallexample
5189
252b5132
RH
5190@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5191@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5192@cindex symbol defaults
5193Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5194defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5195return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5196default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5197shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5198the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5199existed, its value is preserved:
5200
5201@smallexample
5202@group
5203SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5204 .text : @{
5205 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5206 @dots{}
5207 @}
5208 @dots{}
5209@}
5210@end group
5211@end smallexample
5212
3ec57632
NC
5213@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5214@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5215Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5216
252b5132
RH
5217@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5218@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5219@cindex section load address in expression
5220Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5221the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5222attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5223Section LMA}).
5224
5225@kindex MAX
5226@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5227Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5228
5229@kindex MIN
5230@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5231Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5232
5233@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5234@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5235@cindex unallocated address, next
5236Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5237This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5238use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5239output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5240
3ec57632
NC
5241@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5242@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5243Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5244
ba916c8a
MM
5245@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5246@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5247Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5248value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5249option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5250@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5251be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5252``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5253name.
5254
252b5132
RH
5255@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5256@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5257@cindex section size
5258Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5259been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5260evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5261@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5262@smallexample
5263@group
5264SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5265 .output @{
5266 .start = . ;
5267 @dots{}
5268 .end = . ;
5269 @}
5270 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5271 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5272@dots{} @}
5273@end group
5274@end smallexample
5275
5276@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5277@itemx sizeof_headers
5278@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5279@cindex header size
5280Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5281information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5282this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5283choose, to facilitate paging.
5284
5285@cindex not enough room for program headers
5286@cindex program headers, not enough room
5287When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5288@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5289number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5290addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5291additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5292room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5293the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5294script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5295you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5296command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5297@end table
5298
5299@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5300@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5301@cindex implicit linker scripts
5302If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5303an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5304linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5305linker will report an error.
5306
5307An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5308
5309Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5310assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5311commands.
5312
5313Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5314at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5315read. This can affect archive searching.
5316
5317@ifset GENERIC
5318@node Machine Dependent
5319@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5320
5321@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5322@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5323sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5324functionality are not listed.
5325
5326@menu
36f63dca
NC
5327@ifset H8300
5328* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5329@end ifset
5330@ifset I960
5331* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5332@end ifset
5333@ifset ARM
5334* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5335@end ifset
5336@ifset HPPA
5337* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5338@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5339@ifset M68K
5340* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5341@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5342@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5343* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5344@end ifset
2469cfa2 5345@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5346* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5347@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5348@ifset M68HC11
5349* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5350@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5351@ifset POWERPC
5352* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5353@end ifset
5354@ifset POWERPC64
5355* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5356@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5357@ifset SPU
5358* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5359@end ifset
74459f0e 5360@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5361* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5362@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5363@ifset WIN32
5364* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5365@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5366@ifset XTENSA
5367* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5368@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5369@end menu
5370@end ifset
5371
252b5132
RH
5372@ifset H8300
5373@ifclear GENERIC
5374@raisesections
5375@end ifclear
5376
5377@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5378@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5379
5380@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5381For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5382you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5383
5384@table @emph
5385@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5386@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5387@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5388targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5389program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5390respectively.
5391
5392@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5393@item synthesizing instructions
5394@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5395@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5396sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5397page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5398(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5399@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5400top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5401
5402@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5403@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5404biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5405which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5406page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5407(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5408@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5409the top page of memory).
5410
5411@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5412@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
541332 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5414changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5415(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5416@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5417the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5418@end table
5419
5420@ifclear GENERIC
5421@lowersections
5422@end ifclear
5423@end ifset
5424
36f63dca 5425@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5426@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5427@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5428@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5429@node Renesas
5430@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5431
c2dcd04e
NC
5432@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5433H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5434options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5435@end ifset
5436@end ifclear
5437
5438@ifset I960
5439@ifclear GENERIC
5440@raisesections
5441@end ifclear
5442
5443@node i960
5444@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5445
5446@cindex i960 support
5447
5448You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5449specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5450family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5451incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5452linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5453libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5454search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5455
5456For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5457well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5458paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5459the names
5460
5461@smallexample
5462@group
5463try
5464libtry.a
5465tryca
5466libtryca.a
5467@end group
5468@end smallexample
5469
5470@noindent
5471The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5472two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5473
5474You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5475the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5476use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5477specifies a library.
5478
5479@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5480@cindex relaxing on i960
5481@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5482you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5483@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5484them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5485instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5486instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5487target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5488not itself call any subroutines).
5489
5490@ifclear GENERIC
5491@lowersections
5492@end ifclear
5493@end ifset
5494
5495@ifset ARM
5496@ifclear GENERIC
5497@raisesections
5498@end ifclear
5499
93fd0973
SC
5500@ifset M68HC11
5501@ifclear GENERIC
5502@raisesections
5503@end ifclear
5504
5505@node M68HC11/68HC12
5506@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5507
5508@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5509
5510@subsection Linker Relaxation
5511
5512For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5513optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5514
5515@table @emph
5516@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5517@item relaxing address modes
5518@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5519targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5520program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5521respectively.
5522
5523@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5524transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5525page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5526
5527@item relaxing gcc instruction group
5528When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5529of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5530addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5531@code{bset} instructions.
5532
5533@end table
5534
5535@subsection Trampoline Generation
5536
5537@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5538@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5539For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5540call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 5541will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
5542trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5543case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5544point to the function trampoline.
5545
5546@ifclear GENERIC
5547@lowersections
5548@end ifclear
5549@end ifset
5550
36f63dca 5551@node ARM
3674e28a 5552@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
5553
5554@cindex ARM interworking support
5555@kindex --support-old-code
5556For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 5557between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
5558been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5559line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5560libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5561option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5562given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5563which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5564the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5565non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5566
5567@cindex thumb entry point
5568@cindex entry point, thumb
5569@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5570The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5571@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5572But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5573branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5574executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5575
e489d0ae
PB
5576@cindex BE8
5577@kindex --be8
5578The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
5579executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5580The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5581
3674e28a
PB
5582@cindex TARGET1
5583@kindex --target1-rel
5584@kindex --target1-abs
5585The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
5586@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
5587or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
5588and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
5589
5590@cindex TARGET2
5591@kindex --target2=@var{type}
5592The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
5593@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
5594meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
5595@table @samp
5596@item rel
eeac373a
PB
5597@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
5598@item abs
5599@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
5600@item got-rel
5601@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
5602@end table
5603
319850b4
JB
5604@cindex FIX_V4BX
5605@kindex --fix-v4bx
5606The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
5607specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
5608interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
5609also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
5610
5611In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
5612linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
5613@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
5614
5615In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5616relocations are ignored.
5617
845b51d6
PB
5618@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
5619@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
5620Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5621relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
5622
5623@smallexample
5624TST rM, #1
5625MOVEQ PC, rM
5626BX Rn
5627@end smallexample
5628
5629This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
5630and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
5631condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
5632
33bfe774
JB
5633@cindex USE_BLX
5634@kindex --use-blx
5635The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
5636BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
5637situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
5638code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
5639each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
5640
5641This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
5642specify it if you are using that target.
5643
c6dd86c6
JB
5644@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
5645@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
5646The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
5647bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
5648instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
5649to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
5650the support code can read the intended values.
5651
5652The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
5653intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
5654and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
5655intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
5656full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
5657you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
5658
5659If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
5660enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
5661@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
5662mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
5663vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
5664@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
5665
5666If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
5667potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
5668such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
5669first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
5670instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
5671the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
5672are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
5673
bf21ed78
MS
5674@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
5675@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 5676The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
5677warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5678enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
5679linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
5680using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
5681not be diagnosed.
5682
726150b7
NC
5683@cindex PIC_VENEER
5684@kindex --pic-veneer
5685The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
5686ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
5687is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
5688@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
5689
5690@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
5691@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
5692The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
5693code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
5694perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
5695placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
5696controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
5697The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
5698duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
5699group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
5700code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
5701where they should be placed.
5702
5703The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
5704@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
5705placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed before the first
5706branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
5707placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
5708value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
5709exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
5710A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
5711linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
5712from the input sections.
5713
5714The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
5715@samp{N = +1}.
5716
1a51c1a4
NC
5717Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
5718only, because it relies on object files properties not present
5719otherwise.
5720
36f63dca
NC
5721@ifclear GENERIC
5722@lowersections
5723@end ifclear
5724@end ifset
5725
5726@ifset HPPA
5727@ifclear GENERIC
5728@raisesections
5729@end ifclear
5730
5731@node HPPA ELF32
5732@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
5733@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
5734@kindex --multi-subspace
5735When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
5736import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
5737The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
5738stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
5739multiple sub-spaces.
5740
5741@cindex HPPA stub grouping
5742@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
5743Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
5744stub sections located between groups of input sections.
5745@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
5746sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
5747a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
5748the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
5749conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
5750prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
5751A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
5752branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
5753@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
5754@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
5755detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
5756positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
5757
5758Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
5759single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
5760create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
5761large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
5762
5763@ifclear GENERIC
5764@lowersections
5765@end ifclear
5766@end ifset
5767
7fb9f789
NC
5768@ifset M68K
5769@ifclear GENERIC
5770@raisesections
5771@end ifclear
5772
5773@node M68K
5774@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5775
5776@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
5777@kindex --got=@var{type}
5778The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
5779The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
5780@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
5781the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
5782@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
5783entries only at non-negative offsets.
5784@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
5785entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
5786support such GOTs.
5787@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
5788output file. All GOT references from a single input object
5789file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
5790files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
5791
5792@ifclear GENERIC
5793@lowersections
5794@end ifclear
5795@end ifset
5796
36f63dca
NC
5797@ifset MMIX
5798@ifclear GENERIC
5799@raisesections
5800@end ifclear
5801
5802@node MMIX
5803@section @code{ld} and MMIX
5804For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
5805@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
5806understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
5807can translate between the two formats.
5808
5809There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
5810Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
5811registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
5812equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
5813@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
5814global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
5815this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
5816symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
5817
5818Symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
5819@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special;
5820there must be only one each, even if they are local. The default linker
5821script uses these to set the default start address of a section.
5822
5823Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
5824are left out from an mmo file.
5825
5826@ifclear GENERIC
5827@lowersections
5828@end ifclear
5829@end ifset
5830
5831@ifset MSP430
5832@ifclear GENERIC
5833@raisesections
5834@end ifclear
5835
5836@node MSP430
5837@section @code{ld} and MSP430
5838For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
5839will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
5840just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
5841
5842@cindex MSP430 extra sections
5843The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
5844
5845@table @code
5846@item @samp{.vectors}
5847Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
5848
5849@item @samp{.bootloader}
5850Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
5851in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5852
5853@item @samp{.infomem}
5854Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
5855this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5856
c0065db7 5857@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
5858This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
5859in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
5860
5861@item @samp{.noinit}
5862Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
5863
c0065db7 5864The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
5865@end table
5866
5867@ifclear GENERIC
5868@lowersections
5869@end ifclear
5870@end ifset
5871
2a60a7a8
AM
5872@ifset POWERPC
5873@ifclear GENERIC
5874@raisesections
5875@end ifclear
5876
5877@node PowerPC ELF32
5878@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5879@cindex PowerPC long branches
5880@kindex --relax on PowerPC
5881Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
5882displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
5883@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
5884@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
5885the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
5886section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
5887section exceeds 33M in size.
5888
5889@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
5890@table @option
5891@cindex PowerPC PLT
5892@kindex --bss-plt
5893@item --bss-plt
5894Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
5895generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
5896the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
5897writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
5898@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
5899PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
5900compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
5901BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
5902
016687f8
AM
5903@kindex --secure-plt
5904@item --secure-plt
5905@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
5906@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
5907when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
5908layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
5909style BSS PLT.
5910
2a60a7a8
AM
5911@cindex PowerPC GOT
5912@kindex --sdata-got
5913@item --sdata-got
5914The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
5915sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
5916@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
5917section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
5918@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
5919@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
5920@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
5921@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
5922PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
5923pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
5924GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
5925really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
5926
5927@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
5928@kindex --emit-stub-syms
5929@item --emit-stub-syms
5930This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
5931symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
5932
5933@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
5934@kindex --no-tls-optimize
5935@item --no-tls-optimize
5936PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
5937sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
5938disable the optimization.
5939@end table
5940
5941@ifclear GENERIC
5942@lowersections
5943@end ifclear
5944@end ifset
5945
5946@ifset POWERPC64
5947@ifclear GENERIC
5948@raisesections
5949@end ifclear
5950
5951@node PowerPC64 ELF64
5952@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5953
5954@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
5955@table @option
5956@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
5957@kindex --stub-group-size
5958@item --stub-group-size
5959Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
5960by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
5961@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
5962sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
5963a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
5964the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
5965conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
5966prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
5967A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
5968branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
5969@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
5970@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
5971detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
5972positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
5973
5974Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
5975single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
5976create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
5977large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
5978
5979@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
5980@kindex --emit-stub-syms
5981@item --emit-stub-syms
5982This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
5983symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
5984
5985@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
5986@kindex --dotsyms
5987@kindex --no-dotsyms
5988@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
5989These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
5990in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
5991function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
5992code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
5993properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
5994to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
5995@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
5996dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
5997feature.
5998
5999@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6000@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6001@item --no-tls-optimize
6002PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6003sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6004disable the optimization.
6005
6006@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6007@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6008@item --no-opd-optimize
6009PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6010corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6011the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6012Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6013
6014@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6015@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6016@item --non-overlapping-opd
6017Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6018@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6019the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6020entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6021
6022@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6023@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6024@item --no-toc-optimize
6025PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6026entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6027reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6028marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6029marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6030relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6031unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6032reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6033discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6034reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6035code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6036optimization.
6037
6038@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6039@kindex --no-multi-toc
6040@item --no-multi-toc
6041By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6042entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6043total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6044grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6045TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6046calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6047help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
604864K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6049Use this option to turn off this feature.
6050@end table
6051
6052@ifclear GENERIC
6053@lowersections
6054@end ifclear
6055@end ifset
6056
49fa1e15
AM
6057@ifset SPU
6058@ifclear GENERIC
6059@raisesections
6060@end ifclear
6061
6062@node SPU ELF
6063@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6064
6065@cindex SPU ELF options
6066@table @option
6067
6068@cindex SPU plugins
6069@kindex --plugin
6070@item --plugin
6071This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6072
6073@cindex SPU overlays
6074@kindex --no-overlays
6075@item --no-overlays
6076Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6077regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6078@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6079turns off all this special overlay handling.
6080
6081@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6082@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6083@item --emit-stub-syms
6084This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6085symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6086
6087@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6088@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6089@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6090This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6091function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6092on calls to non-overlay regions.
6093
6094@cindex SPU local store size
6095@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6096@item --local-store=lo:hi
6097@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6098the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6099range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6100
c0065db7 6101@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6102@kindex --stack-analysis
6103@item --stack-analysis
6104SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6105unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6106under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6107@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6108@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6109determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6110for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6111for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6112for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6113find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6114and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6115under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6116dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6117is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6118and calls will be given.
6119
c0065db7 6120@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6121@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6122@item --emit-stack-syms
6123This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6124in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6125These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6126functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6127functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6128such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6129The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6130@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6131@end table
6132
6133@ifclear GENERIC
6134@lowersections
6135@end ifclear
6136@end ifset
6137
36f63dca
NC
6138@ifset TICOFF
6139@ifclear GENERIC
6140@raisesections
6141@end ifclear
6142
6143@node TI COFF
6144@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6145@cindex TI COFF versions
6146@kindex --format=@var{version}
6147The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6148TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6149also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6150format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6151header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6152
6153@ifclear GENERIC
6154@lowersections
6155@end ifclear
6156@end ifset
6157
2ca22b03
NC
6158@ifset WIN32
6159@ifclear GENERIC
6160@raisesections
6161@end ifclear
6162
6163@node WIN32
6164@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6165
c0065db7 6166This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6167See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6168command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6169
6170@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6171@cindex import libraries
6172@item import libraries
69da35b5 6173The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6174libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6175regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6176archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6177support for creating such libraries provided with the
6178@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6179
c0065db7
RM
6180@item exporting DLL symbols
6181@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6182The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6183
6184@table @emph
6185@item using auto-export functionality
6186@cindex using auto-export functionality
6187By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6188which is controlled by the following command line options:
6189
0a5d968e
NC
6190@itemize
6191@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6192@item --exclude-symbols
6193@item --exclude-libs
6194@end itemize
6195
c0065db7 6196If, however, @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6197command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6198if either of the following are true:
6199
6200@itemize
6201@item A DEF file is used.
6202@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6203@end itemize
dc8465bf 6204
c0065db7
RM
6205@item using a DEF file
6206@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6207Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6208an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6209exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6210name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6211command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6212
6213@example
6214gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6215@end example
6216
0a5d968e
NC
6217Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6218@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6219
dc8465bf
NC
6220Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6221
6222@example
4b5bd4e7 6223LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6224
6225EXPORTS
6226foo
6227bar
6228_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6229another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6230var1 DATA
c0065db7 6231@end example
dc8465bf 6232
4b5bd4e7
DS
6233This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
6234symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6235alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6236by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6237@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6238@code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
6239
6b31ad16
DS
6240The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6241name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6242the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6243
b45619c0
NC
6244When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6245library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6246@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6247executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6248
6249With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6250specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6251non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6252
6253If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6254or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6255filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6256
4b5bd4e7
DS
6257The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6258
6259@example
6260EXPORTS
6261 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6262 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6263 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
c0065db7 6264@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6265
6266Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6267@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6268@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6269@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6270Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6271@samp{<integer>} alias.
6272
6273The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6274
6275@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6276will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6277by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6278linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6279library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6280
6281@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6282The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6283the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6284@code{*_imp__foo}).
6285
6286@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6287well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6288read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6289variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6290the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6291extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6292application will behave unexpectedly.
6293
6294@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6295it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6296symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6297API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6298the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6299
4b5bd4e7
DS
6300See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6301other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6302
6303@cindex creating a DEF file
6304While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6305with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6306
6307@item Using decorations
6308@cindex Using decorations
6309Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6310itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6311declared as:
6312
6313@example
6314__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6315__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6316@end example
6317
6318All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6319any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6320this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6321the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6322
6323Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6324decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6325instead:
6326
6327@example
6328__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6329__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6330@end example
6331
c0065db7
RM
6332This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6333when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6334variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6335code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6336of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6337omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6338@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6339information.
c0065db7 6340@end table
dc8465bf 6341
2ca22b03
NC
6342@cindex automatic data imports
6343@item automatic data imports
6344The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6345by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6346compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6347issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6348code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6349c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6350initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6351decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6352platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6353command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6354The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6355suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6356trigger the feature's use.
6357
c0065db7 6358auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6359additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6360
c0065db7 6361"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6362documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6363
c0065db7
RM
6364The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6365occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6366One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6367below.
6368
6369@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6370For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6371object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6372offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6373field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6374in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6375without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6376The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6377references.
6378
c0065db7
RM
6379The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6380be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6381themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6382runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6383compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6384support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6385run without error on an older system.
6386
c0065db7
RM
6387@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6388enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6389
6390@cindex direct linking to a dll
6391@item direct linking to a dll
6392The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6393including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6394libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6395traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6396libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6397function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6398though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6399storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6400tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6401large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6402
c0065db7 6403Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6404@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6405of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6406perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6407select the dll instead of an import library.
6408
2ca22b03 6409
69da35b5
NC
6410For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6411to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6412
6413@example
45e948fe
NC
6414libxxx.dll.a
6415xxx.dll.a
6416libxxx.a
6417xxx.lib
69da35b5 6418cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6419libxxx.dll
6420xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6421@end example
6422
69da35b5
NC
6423before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6424
c0065db7
RM
6425(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6426where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6427@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6428file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6429@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6430
c0065db7
RM
6431Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6432@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6433was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6434various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6435could coexist on the same machine.
6436
2ca22b03
NC
6437The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6438applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6439libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6440
6441@example
6442bin/
6443 cygxxx.dll
6444lib/
6445 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 6446 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
6447@end example
6448
c0065db7
RM
6449Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6450done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
6451
64521. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6453@example
6454gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6455@end example
2ca22b03 6456
69da35b5
NC
6457However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6458(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6459@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6460not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6461
2ca22b03
NC
64622. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6463directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6464should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6465making the app/dll.
6466
6467@example
6468ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 6469@end example
2ca22b03
NC
6470
6471Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6472
6473@example
6474gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6475@end example
69da35b5
NC
6476
6477This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6478perfectly legal
6479
6480@example
6481bin/
6482 cygxxx-5.dll
6483lib/
c0065db7 6484 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
6485@end example
6486
dc8465bf 6487Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
6488even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6489@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6490
6491Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 6492wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
6493
64941. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6495work with auto-imported data.
6496
dc8465bf
NC
64972. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6498import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6499symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6500for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6501possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 6502
45e948fe
NC
65033. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6504critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6505in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6506stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6507
69da35b5 6508So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
6509true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6510a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6511binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
6512massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6513requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6514will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 6515
c0065db7 6516@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 6517@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6518@item adding additional names
6519Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
6520A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6521exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6522when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 6523import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 6524
c0065db7 6525@example
dc8465bf
NC
6526LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6527
6528EXPORTS
c0065db7 6529foo
dc8465bf 6530_foo = foo
c0065db7 6531@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6532
6533The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6534
6535Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6536source code using the "weak" attribute:
6537
c0065db7
RM
6538@example
6539void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 6540void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 6541@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6542
6543See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6544symbols.
6545
6546@item renaming symbols
6547Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 6548kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
6549@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
6550DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 6551created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 6552
c0065db7 6553@example
dc8465bf
NC
6554LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6555
6556EXPORTS
6557_foo = foo
c0065db7 6558@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6559
6560The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
6561@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 6562@end table
dc8465bf 6563
0a5d968e 6564Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 6565unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 6566If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
6567@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
6568that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
6569@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
6570renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
6571to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
6572the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
6573In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 6574which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
6575
6576@cindex weak externals
6577@item weak externals
6578The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
6579weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
6580defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
6581are three variants of weak externals:
6582@itemize
6583@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
6584called lazy externals.
6585@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
6586This form is not presently implemented.
6587@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
6588implemented.
6589@end itemize
6590As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
6591are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
6592uses a default value.
2ca22b03
NC
6593@end table
6594
6595@ifclear GENERIC
6596@lowersections
6597@end ifclear
6598@end ifset
6599
e0001a05
NC
6600@ifset XTENSA
6601@ifclear GENERIC
6602@raisesections
6603@end ifclear
6604
6605@node Xtensa
6606@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6607
6608@cindex Xtensa processors
6609The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
6610@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
6611specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
6612keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
6613example, with the command:
6614
6615@smallexample
6616SECTIONS
6617@{
6618 .text : @{
6619 *(.literal .text)
6620 @}
6621@}
6622@end smallexample
6623
6624@noindent
6625@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
6626and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
6627literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
6628interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
6629group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
6630files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
6631and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 6632
43cd72b9 6633@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 6634@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
6635Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
6636provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
6637is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
6638literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
6639will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
6640location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
6641the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
6642unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
6643@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
6644range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
6645
6646For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
6647to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
6648instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
6649instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
6650instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
6651@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
6652hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
6653By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
6654switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
6655density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
6656instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
6657performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
6658linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
6659a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
6660
6661The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
6662control the linker:
6663
6664@cindex Xtensa options
6665@table @option
e0001a05 6666@kindex --no-relax
43cd72b9
BW
6667@item --no-relax
6668Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
6669by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
6670relaxation.
6671
6672@item --size-opt
6673When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
6674more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
6675no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
6676alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
6677preserve the correctness of the code.
6678@end table
e0001a05
NC
6679
6680@ifclear GENERIC
6681@lowersections
6682@end ifclear
6683@end ifset
6684
252b5132
RH
6685@ifclear SingleFormat
6686@node BFD
6687@chapter BFD
6688
6689@cindex back end
6690@cindex object file management
6691@cindex object formats available
6692@kindex objdump -i
6693The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
6694These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
6695object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
6696format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
6697it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
6698associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
6699object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
6700(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
6701list all the formats available for your configuration.
6702
6703@cindex BFD requirements
6704@cindex requirements for BFD
6705As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
6706several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
6707BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
6708formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
6709been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
6710BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
6711may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
6712
6713One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
6714mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
6715useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
6716conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
6717
6718@menu
6719* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
6720@end menu
6721
6722@node BFD outline
36f63dca 6723@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
6724@cindex opening object files
6725@include bfdsumm.texi
6726@end ifclear
6727
6728@node Reporting Bugs
6729@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
6730@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
6731@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 6732
ff5dcc92 6733Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
6734
6735Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
6736it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 6737to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 6738work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 6739@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
6740
6741In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
6742information that enables us to fix the bug.
6743
6744@menu
6745* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
6746* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
6747@end menu
6748
6749@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 6750@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
6751@cindex bug criteria
6752
6753If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
6754
6755@itemize @bullet
6756@cindex fatal signal
6757@cindex linker crash
6758@cindex crash of linker
6759@item
6760If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 6761@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
6762
6763@cindex error on valid input
6764@item
ff5dcc92 6765If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
6766
6767@cindex invalid input
6768@item
ff5dcc92 6769If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
6770may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
6771object files are correct.
6772
6773@item
6774If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 6775improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
6776@end itemize
6777
6778@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 6779@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 6780@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 6781@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
6782
6783A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 6784products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
6785recommend you contact that organization first.
6786
6787You can find contact information for many support companies and
6788individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
6789distribution.
6790
ad22bfe8 6791@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 6792Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
6793@value{BUGURL}.
6794@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6795
6796The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
6797@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
6798fact or leave it out, state it!
6799
6800Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
6801problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
6802assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
6803matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
6804the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
6805location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
6806were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
6807into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
6808specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 6809and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
6810
6811Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
6812the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
6813on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
6814
6815Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
6816bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
6817respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
6818You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
6819
6820To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
6821
6822@itemize @bullet
6823@item
ff5dcc92 6824The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
6825the @samp{--version} argument.
6826
6827Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 6828the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
6829
6830@item
ff5dcc92 6831Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
6832patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
6833
6834@item
6835The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
6836version number.
6837
6838@item
ff5dcc92 6839What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
6840``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
6841
6842@item
6843The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
6844observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
6845list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
6846sufficient.
6847
6848If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
6849and then we might not encounter the bug.
6850
6851@item
6852A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
6853bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
6854provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
6855bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
6856state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
6857requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
6858we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
6859attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
6860
6861If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
6862@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
6863object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
6864@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
6865how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
6866
6867@item
6868A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
6869incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
6870
ff5dcc92 6871Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
6872will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
6873not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
6874a chance to make a mistake.
6875
6876Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
6877say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 6878copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
6879C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
6880and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
6881fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
6882you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
6883any conclusion from our observations.
6884
6885@item
ff5dcc92 6886If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
6887diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
6888@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 6889If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
6890context, not by line number.
6891
6892The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
6893sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
6894@end itemize
6895
6896Here are some things that are not necessary:
6897
6898@itemize @bullet
6899@item
6900A description of the envelope of the bug.
6901
6902Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
6903which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
6904changes will not affect it.
6905
6906This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
6907will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
6908with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
6909We recommend that you save your time for something else.
6910
6911Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
6912of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
6913output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
6914less time, and so on.
6915
6916However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
6917report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
6918
6919@item
6920A patch for the bug.
6921
6922A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
6923the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
6924a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
6925to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
6926
ff5dcc92 6927Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
6928construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
6929through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
6930able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
6931fixed.
6932
6933And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
6934patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
6935help us to understand.
6936
6937@item
6938A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
6939
6940Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
6941things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
6942@end itemize
6943
6944@node MRI
6945@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
6946@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
6947To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
6948linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
6949alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
6950described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
6951simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 6952@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
6953linker commands; these commands are described here.
6954
6955In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
6956file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
6957features to make use of them.
6958
6959You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
6960@samp{-c} command-line option.
6961
6962Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
6963command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
6964blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 6965MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
6966issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
6967
6968Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
6969
6970You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
6971lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
6972The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
6973
6974@table @code
6975@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
6976@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
6977@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 6978Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
6979the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
6980@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
6981your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
6982script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
6983commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
6984input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
6985@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
6986
6987@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
6988@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
6989Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
6990in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
6991
6992@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
6993
6994@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
6995@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
6996Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
6997@var{expression} should be a power of two.
6998
6999@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7000@item BASE @var{expression}
7001Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7002absolute addresses) in the output file.
7003
7004@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7005@item CHIP @var{expression}
7006@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7007This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7008
7009@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7010@item END
7011This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7012
7013@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7014@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7015Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7016language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7017
7018@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7019@item
252b5132
RH
7020S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7021
7022@item
7023IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7024
7025@item
7026COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7027@samp{COFF}
7028@end enumerate
7029
7030@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7031@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7032Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7033@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7034
7035The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7036same line, with no change in its effect.
7037
7038@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7039@item LOAD @var{filename}
7040@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7041Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7042same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7043command line.
7044
7045@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7046@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7047@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7048MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7049option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7050
7051@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7052@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7053@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7054Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7055order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7056script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7057sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7058file, in the order specified.
7059
7060@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7061@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7062@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7063@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7064Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7065@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7066
7067@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7068@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7069@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7070@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7071You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7072specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7073If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7074@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7075@end table
7076
36f63dca 7077@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7078
370b66a1
CD
7079@node LD Index
7080@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7081
7082@printindex cp
7083
7084@tex
7085% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7086% meantime:
7087\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7088\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7089\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7090\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7091\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7092\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7093\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7094\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7095\page\colophon
7096% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7097@end tex
7098
252b5132 7099@bye
This page took 1.419624 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.